diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html | 4575 |
1 files changed, 2293 insertions, 2282 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html index 21076b78590..79beb8a696e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds Jens Lippmann, Marek Rouchal, Martin Wilck and others --> <HTML> <HEAD> -<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 2.01: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE> -<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 2.01: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries"> +<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 2.02: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE> +<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 2.02: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries"> <META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="glossaries-manual"> <META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document"> <META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global"> @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds <P> - <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 2.01: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1> + <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 2.02: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1> <P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Nicola L.C. Talbot <BR> <BR> @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Norwich. Norfolk NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom. <BR><TT><A NAME="tex2html1" HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</A></TT></STRONG></P> -<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>30th May 2009</STRONG></P> +<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>13th July 2009</STRONG></P> <BR> <H2><A NAME="SECTION00010000000000000000"> @@ -174,11 +174,11 @@ glossaries. It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that include symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms. Only those terms used<A NAME="tex2html2" - HREF="#foot3891"><SUP>1</SUP></A> in the document will be + HREF="#foot3899"><SUP>1</SUP></A> in the document will be added to the glossary. <P> -<B>This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="3968"></A> package which is +<B>This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="3976"></A> package which is now obsolete.</B> Please see <A NAME="tex2html3" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html">Upgrading from the glossary package @@ -198,12 +198,12 @@ The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with a <A NAME="tex2html6" HREF="http://www.perl.org/about.html">Perl</A> script -called <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3972"></A>. This provides a convenient interface -to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3975"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="3978"></A>. It is strongly +called <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3980"></A>. This provides a convenient interface +to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3983"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="3986"></A>. It is strongly recommended that you use this script, but <I>it is not essential</I>. If you are reluctant to install Perl, or for any -other reason you don't want to use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3981"></A>, you -can called <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3984"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="3987"></A> explicitly. +other reason you don't want to use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3989"></A>, you +can called <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3992"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="3995"></A> explicitly. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the Associated Glossary Files</A> for further details. @@ -315,14 +315,14 @@ latex minimalgls <P> If you get a <code>Missing \begin{document}</code> error, then - it's most likely that your version of <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="3997"></A> is + it's most likely that your version of <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="4005"></A> is out of date. Check the log file for a warning of that nature. If this is the case, you will need to update the <TT>xkeyval</TT> package. <P> </LI> -<LI>Run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4001"></A> on the document. This can +<LI>Run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4009"></A> on the document. This can be done on a terminal by either typing <PRE> makeglossaries minimalgls @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ perl makeglossaries minimalgls </PRE> If your system doesn't recognise the command <TT>perl</TT> then it's likely you don't have Perl installed. In which case you - will need to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4004"></A> directly. You can do this + will need to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4012"></A> directly. You can do this in a terminal by typing (all on one line): <PRE> makeindex -s minimalgls.ist -t minimalgls.glg -o minimalgls.gls @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ minimalgls.glo </PRE> (See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">later</A> - for further details on using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4007"></A> explicitly.) + for further details on using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4015"></A> explicitly.) <P> Note that if you need to specify the full path and the path @@ -371,10 +371,10 @@ makeglossaries sample4col latex sample4col </PRE> As before, if you don't have Perl installed, you will need to -use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4010"></A> directly instead of using -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4013"></A>. The vertical gap between entries +use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4018"></A> directly instead of using +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4021"></A>. The vertical gap between entries is the gap created at the start of each group. This can be -suppressed by redefining <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="4016"></A> after the glossary +suppressed by redefining <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="4024"></A> after the glossary style has been set: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} @@ -411,8 +411,8 @@ latex sampleAcrDesc </DD> <DT><STRONG>sampleDesc.tex</STRONG></DT> <DD><A NAME="ex:sampleDesc"></A> This is similar to the previous example, -except that it defines the acronyms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="4019"></A> -instead of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4022"></A>. As with +except that it defines the acronyms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="4027"></A> +instead of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4030"></A>. As with the previous example, the glossary is added to the table of contents, so an extra run through LaTeX is required: <PRE> @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ latex sampleDesc <DD><A NAME="ex:sampleDB"></A> This document illustrates how to load external files containing the glossary definitions. It also illustrates how to define a new glossary type. This document -has the number list<A NAME="4024"></A> suppressed and uses <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="4026"></A> to add +has the number list<A NAME="4032"></A> suppressed and uses <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="4034"></A> to add all the entries to the glossaries without referencing each one explicitly. To create the document do: <PRE> @@ -439,8 +439,8 @@ latex sampleDB The glossary definitions are stored in the accompanying files <TT>database1.tex</TT> and <TT>database2.tex</TT>. Note that if you don't have Perl installed, you will need to use -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4029"></A> twice instead of a single call to -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4032"></A>: +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4037"></A> twice instead of a single call to +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4040"></A>: <OL> <LI>Create the main glossary: @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ latex sampleEq </DD> <DT><STRONG>sampleEqPg.tex</STRONG></DT> <DD><A NAME="ex:sampleEqPg"></A> This is similar to the previous example, -but the number lists<A NAME="4035"></A> are a mixture of page +but the number lists<A NAME="4043"></A> are a mixture of page numbers and equation numbers. This example adds the glossary to the table of contents, so an extra LaTeX run is required: <PRE> @@ -511,8 +511,8 @@ latex sampleNtn latex sampleNtn </PRE> Note that if you don't have Perl installed, you will need to use -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4037"></A> twice instead of a single call to -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4040"></A>: +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4045"></A> twice instead of a single call to +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4048"></A>: <OL> <LI>Create the main glossary: @@ -541,10 +541,10 @@ latex sample latex sample </PRE> You can see the difference between word and letter ordering -if you substitute <TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="4050"></A> with -<TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4059"></A>. (Note that this will only have an -effect if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4061"></A>. If you use -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4064"></A> explicitly, you will need to use the +if you substitute <TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="4058"></A> with +<TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4067"></A>. (Note that this will only have an +effect if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4069"></A>. If you use +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4072"></A> explicitly, you will need to use the <TT>-l</TT> switch to indicate letter ordering.) <P> @@ -563,11 +563,11 @@ latex sampletree </DD> <DT><STRONG>samplexdy.tex</STRONG></DT> <DD><A NAME="ex:samplexdy"></A> This document illustrates how to use the -<TT>glossaries</TT> package with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4068"></A> instead of -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4071"></A>. The document uses UTF8 encoding (with the -<TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4074"></A> package). The encoding is picked up by -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4077"></A>. By default, this document will create -a <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4080"></A> style file called <TT>samplexdy.xdy</TT>, but +<TT>glossaries</TT> package with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4076"></A> instead of +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4079"></A>. The document uses UTF8 encoding (with the +<TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4082"></A> package). The encoding is picked up by +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4085"></A>. By default, this document will create +a <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4088"></A> style file called <TT>samplexdy.xdy</TT>, but if you uncomment the lines <PRE> \setStyleFile{samplexdy-mc} @@ -576,12 +576,12 @@ if you uncomment the lines </PRE> it will set the style file to <TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> instead. This provides an additional letter group for entries starting -with "Mc" or "Mac". If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4083"></A>, +with "Mc" or "Mac". If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4091"></A>, you don't need to supply any additional information. If you -don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4086"></A>, you will need to specify the +don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4094"></A>, you will need to specify the required information. Note that if you set the style file to -<TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> you must also specify <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="4089"></A>, -otherwise the <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="4092"></A> package will overwrite +<TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> you must also specify <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="4097"></A>, +otherwise the <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="4100"></A> package will overwrite <TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> and you will lose the "Mc" letter group. <P> @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ makeglossaries samplexdy latex samplexdy </PRE> If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to call -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4095"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4098"></A>. +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4103"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4106"></A>. If you are using the default style file <TT>samplexdy.xdy</TT>, then do (no line breaks): <PRE> @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ samplexdy.glo </DD> <DT><STRONG>sampleutf8.tex</STRONG></DT> <DD><A NAME="ex:sampleutf8"></A> This is another example that uses -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4101"></A>. Unlike <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4104"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4107"></A> can +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4109"></A>. Unlike <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4112"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4115"></A> can cope with accented or non-Latin characters. This document uses UTF8 encoding. To create the document do: <PRE> @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ makeglossaries sampleutf8 latex sampleutf8 </PRE> If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to call -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4110"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4113"></A> +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4118"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4121"></A> (no line breaks): <PRE> xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M sampleutf8 -t sampleutf8.glg @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M sampleutf8 -t sampleutf8.glg </PRE> <P> -If you remove the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4121"></A> option from <TT>sampleutf8.tex</TT> +If you remove the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4129"></A> option from <TT>sampleutf8.tex</TT> and do: <PRE> latex sampleutf8 @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ latex sampleutf8 you will see that the entries that start with a non-Latin character now appear in the symbols group, and the word "manœuvre" is now after "manor" instead of before it. If you are unable to use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4125"></A>, the call to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4128"></A> is as +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4133"></A>, the call to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4136"></A> is as follows (no line breaks): <PRE> makeindex -s sampleutf8.ist -t sampleutf8.glg -o sampleutf8.gls @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ sampleutf8.glo </DD> <DT><STRONG>sampleaccsupp.tex</STRONG></DT> <DD><A NAME="ex:sampleaccsupp"></A> This document -uses the experimental <TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="4131"></A> package. The +uses the experimental <TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="4139"></A> package. The symbol is set to the replacement text. Note that some PDF viewers don't use the accessibility support. Information about the <TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT> package can be found in @@ -671,13 +671,13 @@ Multi-Lingual Support <P> As from version 1.17, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package can now be -used with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4139"></A> as well as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4142"></A>. If you +used with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4147"></A> as well as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4150"></A>. If you are writing in a language that uses accented characters or -non-Latin characters it is recommended that you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4145"></A> -as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4148"></A> is hard-coded for Latin languages. This +non-Latin characters it is recommended that you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4153"></A> +as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4156"></A> is hard-coded for Latin languages. This means that you are not restricted to the A, ..., Z letter groups. -If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4151"></A>, remember to use the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4159"></A> package option. For example: +If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4159"></A>, remember to use the +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4167"></A> package option. For example: <PRE> \documentclass[frenchb]{article} \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} @@ -690,18 +690,18 @@ If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4151"></A>, remember to use the If you use an accented or other expandable character at the start of an entry name, you must place it in a group, or it will cause a problem for commands that convert the first letter to uppercase -(e.g. <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="4163"></A>) due to expansion issues. For example: +(e.g. <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="4171"></A>) due to expansion issues. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{é}lite}, description={select group or class}} </PRE> <P> -If you use the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4166"></A> package, <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4169"></A> +If you use the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4174"></A> package, <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4177"></A> will pick up the encoding from the auxiliary file. If you use -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4172"></A> explicitly instead of via <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4175"></A>, +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4180"></A> explicitly instead of via <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4183"></A>, you may need to specify the encoding using the <TT>-C</TT> -option. Read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4178"></A> manual for further details. +option. Read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4186"></A> manual for further details. <P> @@ -716,13 +716,13 @@ As from version 1.08, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package now has limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent me the relevant translations either via email or via <TT>comp.text.tex</TT>. -However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4182"></A> <I>before</I> -<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. Note that if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4186"></A> is loaded -and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4189"></A> package is detected on T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X's path, then the -<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4192"></A> package will be loaded automatically, however, +However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4190"></A> <I>before</I> +<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. Note that if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4194"></A> is loaded +and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4197"></A> package is detected on T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X's path, then the +<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4200"></A> package will be loaded automatically, however, it may not pick up on the required languages, so if the predefined text is not translated, you may need to explicitly load the -<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4195"></A> package with the required languages. For example: +<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4203"></A> package with the required languages. For example: <PRE> \usepackage[spanish]{babel} \usepackage[spanish]{translator} @@ -738,8 +738,8 @@ than a package option. For example: </PRE> <P> -If you want to use <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="4198"></A> or <TT>german</TT><A NAME="4201"></A> instead -of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4204"></A>, you will need to include the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4207"></A> package +If you want to use <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="4206"></A> or <TT>german</TT><A NAME="4209"></A> instead +of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4212"></A>, you will need to include the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4215"></A> package to provide the translations. For example: <PRE> \documentclass[ngerman]{article} @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ to provide the translations. For example: <P> The following languages are currently supported by the -<TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="4210"></A> package: +<TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="4218"></A> package: <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Language </B></TH> @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ The following languages are currently supported by the </TR> </TABLE> </DIV> -The language dependent commands and <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4213"></A> keys used by the +The language dependent commands and <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4221"></A> keys used by the glossaries package are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">1</A>. <P> @@ -808,41 +808,41 @@ Customised Text</CAPTION> <TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Translator Key Word </B></TH> <TH ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200><B>Purpose</B></TH> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glossaryname</TT><A NAME="4219"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glossaryname</TT><A NAME="4227"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Glossary</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the main glossary.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acronymname</TT><A NAME="4222"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acronymname</TT><A NAME="4230"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Acronyms</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the list of acronyms -(when used with package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4230"></A>).</TD> +(when used with package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4238"></A>).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\entryname</TT><A NAME="4234"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\entryname</TT><A NAME="4242"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Notation (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for first column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries that support headers).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\descriptionname</TT><A NAME="4237"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\descriptionname</TT><A NAME="4245"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Description (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for second column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries that support headers).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\symbolname</TT><A NAME="4240"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\symbolname</TT><A NAME="4248"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbol (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbol column in the glossary for glossary styles that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\pagelistname</TT><A NAME="4243"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\pagelistname</TT><A NAME="4251"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Page List (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for page list column in the glossary for glossaries that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT><A NAME="4246"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT><A NAME="4254"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbols (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbols section of the glossary for glossary styles that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT><A NAME="4249"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT><A NAME="4257"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Numbers (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for numbers section of the glossary for glossary styles that support @@ -856,13 +856,13 @@ this option.</TD> <P> Due to the varied nature of glossaries, it's likely that the predefined translations may not be appropriate. If you are using -the <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4252"></A> package and do not have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4255"></A> package +the <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4260"></A> package and do not have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4263"></A> package installed, you need to be familiar with the advice on <A NAME="tex2html10" HREF="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=latexwords">changing the words babel uses</A>. <P> -If you have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4258"></A> package installed, then it becomes +If you have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4266"></A> package installed, then it becomes much easier to change the default translations. For example, if you are writing in Irish and you want <TT>\symbolname</TT> to produce "Siombail" instead of "Comhartha", then you can put the following @@ -872,9 +872,9 @@ in your document preamble: </PRE> <P> -Note that <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4261"></A> provides much better multi-lingual -support than <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4264"></A>, so it's recommended that you -use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4267"></A> if you have glossary entries that contain +Note that <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4269"></A> provides much better multi-lingual +support than <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4272"></A>, so it's recommended that you +use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4275"></A> if you have glossary entries that contain accented characters or non-Roman letters. See <A NAME="tex2html11" HREF="sec:xindy">Xindy</A> @@ -897,21 +897,21 @@ intermediate step. It is this application that creates the file containing the code that typesets the glossary. If this step is omitted, the glossaries will not appear in your document. The two indexing applications that are most commonly used with -LaTeX are <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4273"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4276"></A>. As +LaTeX are <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4281"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4284"></A>. As from version 1.17, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package can be used with either of these applications. Previous versions were designed -to be used with <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4280"></A> only. Note that -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4283"></A> has much better multi-lingual support than -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4286"></A>, so <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4289"></A> is recommended if you're +to be used with <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4288"></A> only. Note that +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4291"></A> has much better multi-lingual support than +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4294"></A>, so <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4297"></A> is recommended if you're not writing in English. Commands that only have an -effect when <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4292"></A> is used are described +effect when <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4300"></A> is used are described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindy">later</A>. <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with the Perl script -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4296"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4299"></A> or -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4302"></A> on all the glossary files using a customized style -file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4305"></A>). See +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4304"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4307"></A> or +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4310"></A> on all the glossary files using a customized style +file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4313"></A>). See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossariesapp">Using the makeglossaries Perl script</A> for further details. Perl is stable, cross-platform, open source software that @@ -919,24 +919,24 @@ is used by a number of T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X-related applications. Further information is available at <TT><A NAME="tex2html12" HREF="http://www.perl.org/about.html">http://www.perl.org/about.html</A></TT>. However, whilst it is strongly recommended that you use the -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4308"></A> script, it is possible to use the +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4316"></A> script, it is possible to use the <TT>glossaries</TT> package without having Perl installed. In which -case, if you have used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4317"></A> package option, you will -need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4321"></A> (see +case, if you have used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4325"></A> package option, you will +need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4329"></A> (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindyapp">Using xindy explicitly</A>), otherwise you will need to use -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4324"></A> (see +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4332"></A> (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">Using makeindex explicitly</A>). Note that some commands and package options have no effect if you don't use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4327"></A>. These are listed in +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4335"></A>. These are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>. <P> Note that if any of your entries use an entry that is not referenced outside the glossary, you will need to -do an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4333"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4336"></A> -or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4339"></A> run, as appropriate. For example, +do an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4341"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4344"></A> +or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4347"></A> run, as appropriate. For example, suppose you have defined the following entries: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{citrusfruit}{name={citrus fruit}, @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ and suppose you have <code>\gls{citrusfruit}</code> in your document but don't reference the <TT>orange</TT> entry, then the <TT>orange</TT> entry won't appear in your glossary until you first create the glossary and then do another run -of <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4342"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4345"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4348"></A>. +of <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4350"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4353"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4356"></A>. For example, if the document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT>, then you must do: <PRE> @@ -962,17 +962,17 @@ latex myDoc </PRE> <P> -Likewise, an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4351"></A> and LaTeX run +Likewise, an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4359"></A> and LaTeX run may be required if the document pages shift with re-runs. For example, if the page numbering is not reset after the table of contents, the insertion of the table of contents on the second LaTeX run may push glossary entries across page boundaries, which -means that the number lists<A NAME="4353"></A> in the glossary may +means that the number lists<A NAME="4361"></A> in the glossary may need updating. <P> The examples in this document assume that you are accessing -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4355"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4358"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4361"></A> via +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4363"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4366"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4369"></A> via a terminal. Windows users can use the MSDOS Prompt which is usually accessed via the <I>Start</I>-><I>All Programs</I> @@ -985,38 +985,38 @@ details. <P> If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files -(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4364"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="4366"></A>) for messages. +(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4372"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="4374"></A>) for messages. <P> <BR><P></P> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="tab:makeglossariesCmds"></A><A NAME="3660"></A> +<A NAME="tab:makeglossariesCmds"></A><A NAME="3668"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 2:</STRONG> Commands and package options that have no effect when using <TT>xindy</TT> or <TT>makeindex</TT> explicity</CAPTION> <TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Command or Package Option </B></TH> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4368"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4371"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4376"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4379"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4381"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4389"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-l</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-M ord/letorder</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="4390"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="4398"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">default</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">default</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4397"></A>={<TT>language=</TT><I>lang</I><TT>,codename=</TT><I>code</I>}</TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4405"></A>={<TT>language=</TT><I>lang</I><TT>,codename=</TT><I>code</I>}</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-L</TT> <I>lang</I> <TT>-C</TT> <I>code</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT><A NAME="4403"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>lang</EM><TT>}</TT></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT><A NAME="4411"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>lang</EM><TT>}</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-L</TT> <I>lang</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT><A NAME="4406"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>code</EM><TT>}</TT></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT><A NAME="4414"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>code</EM><TT>}</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-C</TT> <I>code</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> @@ -1039,12 +1039,12 @@ Using the makeglossaries Perl Script </H3> <P> -The <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4412"></A> script picks up the relevant -information from the auxiliary (<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="4415"></A>) file and -will either call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4417"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4420"></A>, +The <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4420"></A> script picks up the relevant +information from the auxiliary (<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="4423"></A>) file and +will either call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4425"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4428"></A>, depending on the supplied information. Therefore, you only need to pass the document's name without the extension to -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4423"></A>. +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4431"></A>. For example, if your document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT>, type the following in your terminal: <PRE> @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ latex myDoc makeglossaries myDoc latex myDoc </PRE> -You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4426"></A> into +You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4434"></A> into Perl: <PRE> perl makeglossaries myDoc @@ -1073,20 +1073,20 @@ Using xindy explicitly </H3> <P> -If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4432"></A> to process the glossary +If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4440"></A> to process the glossary files, you must make sure you have used the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4440"></A> package option: +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4448"></A> package option: <PRE> \usepackage[xindy]{glossaries} </PRE> -This is required regardless of whether you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4444"></A> +This is required regardless of whether you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4452"></A> explicitly or whether it's called implicitly via -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4447"></A>. This causes the glossary -entries to be written in raw <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4450"></A> format, so you need to +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4455"></A>. This causes the glossary +entries to be written in raw <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4458"></A> format, so you need to use <TT>-I xindy</TT> <I>not</I> <TT>-I tex</TT>. <P> -To run <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4453"></A> type the following in your terminal +To run <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4461"></A> type the following in your terminal (all on one line): <BR> <BR><TT>xindy -L </TT> <I>language</I><TT> -C </TT> <I>encoding</I><TT> -I xindy @@ -1098,10 +1098,10 @@ To run <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4453"></A> type the following in your terminal <BR> where <I>language</I> is the required language name, <I>encoding</I> is the encoding, <I>base</I> is the name of the document without the -<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="4456"></A> extension and <I>style</I> is the name of the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4458"></A> style file without the <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4461"></A> extension. -The default name for this style file is <I>base</I><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4463"></A> -but can be changed via <TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="4465"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. You may need +<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="4464"></A> extension and <I>style</I> is the name of the +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4466"></A> style file without the <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4469"></A> extension. +The default name for this style file is <I>base</I><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4471"></A> +but can be changed via <TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="4473"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. You may need to specify the full path name depending on the current working directory. If any of the file names contain spaces, you must delimit them using double-quotes. @@ -1117,27 +1117,27 @@ xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo <P> Note that this just creates the main glossary. You need to do the same for each of the other glossaries (including the -list of acronyms if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4473"></A> -package option), substituting <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4477"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="4479"></A> -and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="4481"></A> with the relevant extensions. For example, -if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4488"></A> package option, then +list of acronyms if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4481"></A> +package option), substituting <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4485"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="4487"></A> +and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="4489"></A> with the relevant extensions. For example, +if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4496"></A> package option, then you would need to do: <PRE> xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn </PRE> For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied -when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4492"></A>. +when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4500"></A>. <P> -Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4495"></A> instead, you can -replace all those calls to <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4498"></A> with just one call -to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4501"></A>: +Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4503"></A> instead, you can +replace all those calls to <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4506"></A> with just one call +to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4509"></A>: <PRE> makeglossaries myDoc </PRE> Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if -you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4504"></A> explicitly instead of using -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4507"></A>. These are listed in +you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4512"></A> explicitly instead of using +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4515"></A>. These are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>. <P> @@ -1152,10 +1152,10 @@ Using makeindex explicitly </H3> <P> -If you want to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4516"></A> explicitly, you must -make sure that you haven't used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4524"></A> package +If you want to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4524"></A> explicitly, you must +make sure that you haven't used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4532"></A> package option or the glossary entries will be written in the wrong -format. To run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4528"></A>, type the following in +format. To run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4536"></A>, type the following in your terminal: <BR> <BR><TT>makeindex -s </TT> <I>style</I><TT>.ist -t </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.glg @@ -1164,11 +1164,11 @@ your terminal: <BR> <BR> where <I>base</I> is the name of your document without the -<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="4531"></A> extension and <I>style</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4533"></A> is the -name of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4535"></A> style file. By default, this is -<I>base</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4538"></A>, but may be changed via -<TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="4540"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. Note that there are other options, -such as <TT>-l</TT> (letter ordering). See the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4543"></A> +<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="4539"></A> extension and <I>style</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4541"></A> is the +name of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4543"></A> style file. By default, this is +<I>base</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4546"></A>, but may be changed via +<TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="4548"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. Note that there are other options, +such as <TT>-l</TT> (letter ordering). See the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4551"></A> manual for further details. <P> @@ -1179,28 +1179,28 @@ makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo </PRE> Note that this only creates the main glossary. If you have additional glossaries (for example, if you have used the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4551"></A> package option) then you must call -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4555"></A> for each glossary, substituting -<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4558"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="4560"></A> and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="4562"></A> with the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4559"></A> package option) then you must call +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4563"></A> for each glossary, substituting +<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4566"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="4568"></A> and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="4570"></A> with the relevant extensions. For example, if you have used the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4569"></A> package option, then you need to type the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4577"></A> package option, then you need to type the following in your terminal: <PRE> makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn </PRE> For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied -when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4573"></A>. +when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4581"></A>. <P> -Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4576"></A> instead, you can -replace all those calls to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4579"></A> with just one call -to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4582"></A>: +Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4584"></A> instead, you can +replace all those calls to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4587"></A> with just one call +to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4590"></A>: <PRE> makeglossaries myDoc </PRE> Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if -you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4585"></A> explicitly instead of using -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4588"></A>. These are listed in +you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4593"></A> explicitly instead of using +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4596"></A>. These are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>. <P> @@ -1213,8 +1213,8 @@ Note to Front-End and Script Developers</A> </H3> <P> -The information needed to determine whether to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4597"></A> -or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4600"></A> and the information needed to call those +The information needed to determine whether to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4605"></A> +or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4608"></A> and the information needed to call those applications is stored in the auxiliary file. This information can be gathered by a front-end, editor or script to make the glossaries where appropriate. This section describes how the information is @@ -1245,8 +1245,8 @@ The indexing application's style file is specified by <BR><TT>\@istfilename{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -The file extension indicates whether to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4605"></A> -(<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4608"></A>) or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4610"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4613"></A>). Note that +The file extension indicates whether to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4613"></A> +(<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="4616"></A>) or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4618"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="4621"></A>). Note that the glossary information is formatted differently depending on which indexing application is supposed to be used, so it's important to call the correct one. @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ Word or letter ordering is specified by: where <I>order</I> can be either <TT>word</TT> or <TT>letter</TT>. <P> -If <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4615"></A> should be used, the language and code page +If <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4623"></A> should be used, the language and code page for each glossary is specified by <BR> <BR><TT>\@xdylanguage{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>language</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ for each glossary is specified by where <I>label</I> identifies the glossary, <I>language</I> is the root language (e.g. <TT>english</TT>) and <I>code</I> is the encoding (e.g. <TT>utf8</TT>). These commands are omitted -if <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4618"></A> should be used. +if <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4626"></A> should be used. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -1310,16 +1310,16 @@ Missing \begin{document} </PRE> <P> -<B>A.</B> Check you are using an up to date version of the <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="4627"></A> +<B>A.</B> Check you are using an up to date version of the <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="4635"></A> package. <P> </LI> -<LI><B>Q.</B> I've used the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4635"></A> option, but the acronyms +<LI><B>Q.</B> I've used the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4643"></A> option, but the acronyms are displayed in normal sized upper case letters. <P> -<B>A.</B> The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4644"></A> package option uses <TT>\textsc</TT> to typeset +<B>A.</B> The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4652"></A> package option uses <TT>\textsc</TT> to typeset the acronyms. This command converts lower case letters to small capitals, while upper case letters remain their usual size. Therefore you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters. @@ -1329,7 +1329,7 @@ you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters. <LI><B>Q.</B> How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in? <P> -<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4653"></A> package +<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4661"></A> package option and redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use the required typesetting command. For example, suppose you would like the acronyms displayed in a sans-serif font, then you can do: @@ -1341,15 +1341,15 @@ a sans-serif font, then you can do: <P> </LI> <LI><B>Q.</B> How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in -on first use<A NAME="4656"></A>? +on first use<A NAME="4664"></A>? <P> -<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4663"></A> package +<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4671"></A> package option and redefine <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> to use the required command. Note that if you don't want the acronym on subsequent use to use <TT>\textsmaller</TT>, you will also need to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT>, as above. For example to make the acronym emphasized on -first use<A NAME="4666"></A>, but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do: +first use<A NAME="4674"></A>, but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do: <PRE> \usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} \renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} @@ -1359,22 +1359,22 @@ first use<A NAME="4666"></A>, but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, y <P> </LI> <LI><B>Q.</B> I don't have Perl installed, do I have to use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4668"></A>? +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4676"></A>? <P> <B>A.</B> Although it is strongly recommended that you use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4671"></A>, you don't have to use it. +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4679"></A>, you don't have to use it. For further details, read <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindyapp">Using xindy explicitly</A> or <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">Using makeindex explicitly</A>, depending on -whether you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4674"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4677"></A>. +whether you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4682"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4685"></A>. <P> </LI> <LI><B>Q.</B> I'm used to using the <TT>glossary</TT> package: are there any -instructions on migrating from the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="4681"></A> package to the +instructions on migrating from the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="4689"></A> package to the <TT>glossaries</TT> package? <P> @@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ same location as this document. <P> </LI> -<LI><B>Q.</B> I'm using <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4685"></A> but the fixed names haven't been +<LI><B>Q.</B> I'm using <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4693"></A> but the fixed names haven't been translated. <P> @@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ to the next version. <P> If you are using one of the above languages, but the text hasn't been -translated, try adding the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4689"></A> package with the +translated, try adding the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4697"></A> package with the required languages explicitly (before you load the <TT>glossaries</TT> package). For example: <PRE> @@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ for further details. <P> </LI> <LI><B>Q.</B> My acronyms contain strange characters when I use commands -like <TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="4694"></A>. +like <TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="4702"></A>. <P> <B>A.</B> Switch off the sanitization: @@ -1430,12 +1430,12 @@ and protect fragile commands. <B>A.</B> Remember to do the following: <UL> -<LI>Add <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4697"></A> to the document preamble. +<LI>Add <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4705"></A> to the document preamble. <P> </LI> -<LI>Use either <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="4700"></A> for each glossary that has -been defined or <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="4703"></A>. +<LI>Use either <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="4708"></A> for each glossary that has +been defined or <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="4711"></A>. <P> </LI> @@ -1450,17 +1450,17 @@ that you want to appear in the glossary. <P> </LI> -<LI>Run LaTeX on your document, then run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4706"></A>, +<LI>Run LaTeX on your document, then run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4714"></A>, then run LaTeX on your document again. If you want the glossaries to appear in the table of contents, you will need an extra LaTeX run. If any of your entries cross-reference an entry that's not referenced in the main body of the document, you will need to -<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4712"></A></A> +<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4720"></A></A> after the second LaTeX run, followed by another LaTeX run. </LI> </UL> <P> -Check the log files (<TT>.log</TT><A NAME="4715"></A>, <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4717"></A> etc) for any +Check the log files (<TT>.log</TT><A NAME="4723"></A>, <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4725"></A> etc) for any warnings. <P> @@ -1470,15 +1470,15 @@ the glossary entries? <P> <B>A.</B> If it's for an individual entry, then you can -use the entry's <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4719"></A> key to sort it according to a +use the entry's <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4727"></A> key to sort it according to a different term. If it's for the entire alphabet, then you will need -to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4722"></A> (instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4725"></A>) and use an -appropriate <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4728"></A> language module. Writing <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4731"></A> +to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4730"></A> (instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4733"></A>) and use an +appropriate <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4736"></A> language module. Writing <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4739"></A> modules or styles is beyond the scope of this manual. Further -information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4734"></A> can be found at the +information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4742"></A> can be found at the <A NAME="tex2html18" HREF="http://xindy.sourceforge.net/">Xindy Web Site</A>. -There is also a link to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4737"></A> mailing list from that +There is also a link to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4745"></A> mailing list from that site. <P> @@ -1506,51 +1506,51 @@ Package Options <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package options are as follows: <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4749"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4757"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>Add the glossaries to the table of contents. Note that an extra LaTeX run is required with this option. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="4758"></A></STRONG></DT> -<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4767"></A>, this will +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="4766"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4775"></A>, this will add <TT>\numberline</TT><code>{}</code> in the final argument of <TT>\addcontentsline</TT>. This will align the table of contents entry with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no -effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4776"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4785"></A> is -used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="4794"></A>, the title will be aligned with +effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4784"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="4793"></A> is +used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="4802"></A>, the title will be aligned with the section numbers rather than the section titles. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4803"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4811"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This creates a new glossary with the label <TT>acronym</TT>. This is equivalent to: <PRE> \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} </PRE> -If the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4812"></A> package option is used, <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4816"></A> +If the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4820"></A> package option is used, <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4824"></A> is set to <TT>acronym</TT> otherwise it is set to <TT>main</TT>.<A NAME="tex2html19" - HREF="#foot3688"><SUP>3</SUP></A> -Entries that are defined using <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4837"></A> are placed in -the glossary whose label is given by <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4840"></A>, unless + HREF="#foot3696"><SUP>3</SUP></A> +Entries that are defined using <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4845"></A> are placed in +the glossary whose label is given by <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4848"></A>, unless another glossary is explicitly specified. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="4848"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="4856"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This suppresses the creation of the main glossary. Note that if you use this option, you must create another glossary in which to put all your entries (either via the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4857"></A> package option described above or via -<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4861"></A> described in +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4865"></A> package option described above or via +<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="4869"></A> described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglossary">Defining New Glossaries</A>). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="4869"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="4877"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g. chapter). This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, @@ -1572,12 +1572,23 @@ You can change this value later in the document using <BR><TT>\setglossarysection{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -where <I>name</I> is the sectional unit. +where <I>name</I> is the sectional unit. The start of each glossary +adds information to the page header via +<TT>\glossarymark{</TT><EM>glossary title</EM><TT>}</TT>. +This defaults to <TT>\@mkboth</TT>, but you may need to redefine it. +For example, to only change the right header: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{\markright{#1}} +</PRE> +or to prevent it from changing the headers: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{} +</PRE> <P> -Note that if you are using the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="4873"></A> package and the +Note that if you are using the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="4881"></A> package and the glossaries are put in chapters, you may need to redefine -<TT>\glsclearpage</TT><A NAME="4876"></A> to do <TT>\clearpage</TT><A NAME="4879"></A> instead of +<TT>\glsclearpage</TT><A NAME="4884"></A> to do <TT>\clearpage</TT><A NAME="4887"></A> instead of <TT>\cleardoublepage</TT> to prevent an unwanted blank page appearing before the glossary: <PRE> @@ -1586,18 +1597,18 @@ before the glossary: <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="4887"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="4895"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default, -but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="4896"></A>. This option can take -three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="4900"></A> (no -number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="4902"></A> +but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="4904"></A>. This option can take +three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="4908"></A> (no +number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="4910"></A> (numbered, i.e. unstarred form, but not labelled) and -<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="4904"></A> (numbered with automatic -labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="4913"></A> is used, each +<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="4912"></A> (numbered with automatic +labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="4921"></A> is used, each glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the main (default) glossary is labelled <TT>main</TT>, the list of acronyms is labelled <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="tex2html20" - HREF="#foot3691"><SUP>4</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled + HREF="#foot3699"><SUP>4</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT>. For example, if you load <TT>glossaries</TT> using: @@ -1612,9 +1623,9 @@ acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}. </PRE> If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use -<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4925"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4933"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT> -if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4942"></A> option is used. For example: +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4933"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4941"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT> +if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4950"></A> option is used. For example: <PRE> The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. </PRE> @@ -1638,150 +1649,150 @@ The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="4951"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="4959"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined glossary styles are listed <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">later</A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="4960"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="4968"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package -from automatically loading <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="4965"></A> (which means that -the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="4968"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces +from automatically loading <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="4973"></A> (which means that +the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="4976"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Not that if you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-long</TT> package. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="4977"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="4985"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package -from automatically loading <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="4982"></A> (which means that -the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="4985"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces +from automatically loading <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="4990"></A> (which means that +the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="4993"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Not that if you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-super</TT> package. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="4994"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="5002"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package -from automatically loading <TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="4999"></A>. This reduces +from automatically loading <TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="5007"></A>. This reduces overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Not that if you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-list</TT> package. -Note that since the default style is <TT>list</TT><A NAME="5003"></A>, you will -also need to use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5010"></A> option to set the style to +Note that since the default style is <TT>list</TT><A NAME="5011"></A>, you will +also need to use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5018"></A> option to set the style to something else. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>notree</TT><A NAME="5019"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>notree</TT><A NAME="5027"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package -from automatically loading <TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="5024"></A>. This reduces +from automatically loading <TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="5032"></A>. This reduces overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Not that if you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-tree</TT> package. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="5033"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="5041"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This prevents all the predefined styles from being loaded. This option is provided in the event that the user has custom styles that are not dependent on the styles provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. Note that if you use -this option, you can't use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5043"></A> package option. Instead -you must either use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="5047"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT> or -the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5050"></A> key in the -optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5053"></A>. +this option, you can't use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5051"></A> package option. Instead +you must either use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="5055"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT> or +the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5058"></A> key in the +optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5061"></A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5061"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5069"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option will suppress the -associated number lists<A NAME="5064"></A> in the glossaries (see also +associated number lists<A NAME="5072"></A> in the glossaries (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5071"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5079"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. The value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number -lists<A NAME="5074"></A>. +lists<A NAME="5082"></A>. <P> <A NAME="sanitize"></A> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5081"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5089"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option whose value is also a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list. By default, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package sanitizes the values of the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5086"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5089"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5092"></A> keys used +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5094"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5097"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5100"></A> keys used when defining a new glossary entry. This means that you can use fragile commands in those keys, but it may lead to unexpected results if you try to display these values within the document text. This -sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5100"></A> package +sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5108"></A> package option. For example, to switch off the sanitization for the -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5104"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5107"></A> keys, but not for the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5110"></A> key, do: +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5112"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5115"></A> keys, but not for the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5118"></A> key, do: <PRE> \usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,% symbol=true}]{glossaries} </PRE> -You can use <TT>sanitize=none</TT><A NAME="5120"></A> as a shortcut for +You can use <TT>sanitize=none</TT><A NAME="5128"></A> as a shortcut for <BR> <TT>sanitize={name=false,description=false,symbol=false}</TT>. <P> -<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5123"></A>, -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5126"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5129"></A> keys. It doesn't apply -to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5132"></A> key which is +<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5131"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5134"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5137"></A> keys. It doesn't apply +to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5140"></A> key which is always sanitized) so fragile commands contained in the value of the other keys must always be protected using <TT>\protect</TT>. -Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5135"></A> key is obtained from the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5138"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands -in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5141"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5144"></A> key. +Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5143"></A> key is obtained from the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5146"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands +in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5149"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5152"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="5152"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="5160"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5156"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5164"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="5164"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="5172"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5168"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5176"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="5176"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="5184"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5180"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5188"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="5188"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="5196"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5192"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5200"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="5200"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="5208"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5204"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded. +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5212"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="5212"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="5220"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option provides shortcut commands for acronyms. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> @@ -1789,27 +1800,27 @@ for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5221"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5229"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>(Default) The glossary information and -indexing style file will be written in <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5225"></A> format. If you use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5228"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs -to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5231"></A>. If you don't use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5234"></A>, you need to remember to use -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5237"></A> not <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5240"></A>. The indexing style file -will been given a <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5243"></A> extension. +indexing style file will be written in <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5233"></A> format. If you use +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5236"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs +to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5239"></A>. If you don't use +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5242"></A>, you need to remember to use +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5245"></A> not <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5248"></A>. The indexing style file +will been given a <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5251"></A> extension. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5250"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5258"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The glossary information and indexing style file will -be written in <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5254"></A> format. If you use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5257"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs -to call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5260"></A>. If you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5263"></A>, -you need to remember to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5266"></A> not <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5269"></A>. -The indexing style file will been given a <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5272"></A> extension. +be written in <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5262"></A> format. If you use +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5265"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs +to call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5268"></A>. If you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5271"></A>, +you need to remember to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5274"></A> not <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5277"></A>. +The indexing style file will been given a <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5280"></A> extension. <P> -The <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5279"></A> package option may additionally have a +The <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5287"></A> package option may additionally have a value that is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> comma-separated list to override the language and codepage. For example: <PRE> @@ -1822,20 +1833,20 @@ example: \usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries} </PRE> See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindy">Xindy</A> -for further details on using <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5283"></A> with the +for further details on using <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5291"></A> with the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>order</TT><A NAME="5292"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>order</TT><A NAME="5300"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This may take two values: -<TT>word</TT><A NAME="5296"></A> or <TT>letter</TT><A NAME="5298"></A>. The default +<TT>word</TT><A NAME="5304"></A> or <TT>letter</TT><A NAME="5306"></A>. The default is word ordering. Note that this option has no effect if you -don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5300"></A>. +don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5308"></A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nowarn</TT><A NAME="5308"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nowarn</TT><A NAME="5316"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This suppresses all warnings generated by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. @@ -1856,18 +1867,18 @@ Defining Glossary Entries <P> All glossary entries must be defined before they are used, so it is better to define them in the preamble to ensure this.<A NAME="tex2html21" - HREF="#foot3713"><SUP>5</SUP></A> However + HREF="#foot3721"><SUP>5</SUP></A> However only those entries that occur in the document (using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A>, <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A> or <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary file -(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="5316"></A>), which then needs to be converted into a -corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="5318"></A> file which contains the typeset -glossary which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5320"></A> or -<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="5323"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5326"></A> can -be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5329"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5332"></A>, using a +(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="5324"></A>), which then needs to be converted into a +corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="5326"></A> file which contains the typeset +glossary which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5328"></A> or +<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="5331"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5334"></A> can +be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5337"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5340"></A>, using a customised indexing style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined in the document. Note that there should be no need for you to explicitly edit or input any of these external files. See @@ -1877,8 +1888,8 @@ for further details. <P> The command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> must be placed in the preamble in -order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5335"></A> (<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5338"></A>) -or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5340"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5343"></A>) +order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5343"></A> (<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5346"></A>) +or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5348"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5351"></A>) style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the appropriate output files. If you omit <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> none of the glossaries will be created. @@ -1891,14 +1902,14 @@ to use those commands after <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> you will generate an error. <P> -You can suppress the creation of the customised <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5346"></A> -or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5349"></A> style file using <TT>\noist</TT>. Note that this +You can suppress the creation of the customised <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5354"></A> +or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5357"></A> style file using <TT>\noist</TT>. Note that this command must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>. <P> The default name for the customised style file is given by -<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="5352"></A><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5355"></A> (for <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5357"></A>) or -<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="5360"></A><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5363"></A> (for <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5365"></A>). This name may be +<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="5360"></A><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5363"></A> (for <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5365"></A>) or +<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="5368"></A><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5371"></A> (for <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5373"></A>). This name may be changed using: <BR> <BR> @@ -1910,10 +1921,10 @@ extension. Note that this command must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>. <P> -Each glossary entry is assigned a number list<A NAME="5367"></A> that lists all +Each glossary entry is assigned a number list<A NAME="5375"></A> that lists all the locations in the document where that entry was used. By default, the location refers to the page number but this may be overridden -using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5374"></A> package option. The default form of +using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5382"></A> package option. The default form of the location number assumes a full stop compositor (e.g. 1.2), but if your location numbers use a different compositor (e.g. 1-2) you need to set this using @@ -1928,7 +1939,7 @@ For example: Note that this command must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>. <P> -If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5378"></A>, you can have a different compositor +If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5386"></A>, you can have a different compositor for page numbers starting with an uppercase alphabetical character using: <BR> @@ -1936,8 +1947,8 @@ character using: <BR> <BR> Note that this command has no effect if you haven't used the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5386"></A> package option. For example, if you want -number lists<A NAME="5389"></A> containing a mixture of A-1 and 2.3 +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5394"></A> package option. For example, if you want +number lists<A NAME="5397"></A> containing a mixture of A-1 and 2.3 style formats, then do: <PRE> \glsSetCompositor{.} @@ -1945,7 +1956,7 @@ style formats, then do: </PRE> See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number lists</A> for -further information about number lists<A NAME="5390"></A>. +further information about number lists<A NAME="5398"></A>. <P> New glossary entries are defined using the command: @@ -1957,21 +1968,21 @@ The first argument, <I>label</I>, must be a unique label with which to identify this entry. The second argument, <I>key-val list</I>, is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list that supplies the relevant information -about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5392"></A> and -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5395"></A>, except for sub-entries where the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5398"></A> field may be omitted. Available fields are listed +about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5400"></A> and +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5403"></A>, except for sub-entries where the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5406"></A> field may be omitted. Available fields are listed below: <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="5401"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="5409"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The name of the entry (as it will appear in -the glossary). If this key is omitted and the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5404"></A> +the glossary). If this key is omitted and the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5412"></A> key is supplied, this value will be the same as the parent's name. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="5407"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="5415"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>A brief description of this term (to appear in the glossary). Within this value, you can use <TT>\nopostdesc</TT> to suppress the @@ -1981,12 +1992,12 @@ can do <code>description={\nopostdesc}</code>. If you want a paragraph break in the description use <TT>\glspar</TT>. However, note that not all glossary styles support multi-line descriptions. If you are using one of the tabular-like glossary -styles that permit multi-line descriptions, use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="5410"></A> +styles that permit multi-line descriptions, use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="5418"></A> not <code>\\</code> if you want to force a line break. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5413"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5421"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The label of the parent entry. Note that the parent entry must be defined before its sub-entries. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:subentries">Sub-Entries</A> for @@ -1994,57 +2005,57 @@ further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="5416"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="5424"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The plural form of the -description (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5419"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5422"></A> -by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5425"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="5428"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="5431"></A>). If omitted, the value -is set to the same as the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5434"></A> key. +description (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5427"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5430"></A> +by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5433"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="5436"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="5439"></A>). If omitted, the value +is set to the same as the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5442"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="5437"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="5445"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How this entry will appear in the document text -when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5440"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this -field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5443"></A> key is used. +when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5448"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this +field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5451"></A> key is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="5446"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="5454"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the document text -the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5449"></A><A NAME="5451"></A> (or one of its uppercase -variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5453"></A> +the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5457"></A><A NAME="5459"></A> (or one of its uppercase +variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5461"></A> key is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5456"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5464"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the document text -when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5459"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). +when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5467"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending -<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="5462"></A> to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5465"></A> field. +<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="5470"></A> to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5473"></A> field. The default value of <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> is the letter "s". <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5468"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5476"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the -document text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5471"></A><A NAME="5473"></A> (or one of its +document text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5479"></A><A NAME="5481"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained -from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5475"></A> key, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5478"></A> key is omitted, -or by appending <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="5481"></A> to the value of the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5484"></A> field, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5487"></A> field is present. +from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5483"></A> key, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5486"></A> key is omitted, +or by appending <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="5489"></A> to the value of the +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5492"></A> field, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5495"></A> field is present. <P> <B>Note:</B> prior to version 1.13, the default value of -<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5490"></A> was always taken by appending "s" to the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5493"></A> key, which meant that you had to specify both -<TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5496"></A> and <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5499"></A>, even if you hadn't -used the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5502"></A> key. +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5498"></A> was always taken by appending "s" to the +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5501"></A> key, which meant that you had to specify both +<TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5504"></A> and <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5507"></A>, even if you hadn't +used the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5510"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5505"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5513"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This field is provided to allow the user to specify an associated symbol. If omitted, the value is set to <TT>\relax</TT>. Note that not all glossary styles display the @@ -2052,40 +2063,40 @@ symbol. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="5508"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="5516"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the plural form of the -symbol (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5511"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5514"></A> -by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5517"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="5520"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="5523"></A>). If omitted, the value -is set to the same as the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5526"></A> key. +symbol (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5519"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5522"></A> +by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5525"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="5528"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="5531"></A>). If omitted, the value +is set to the same as the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5534"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5529"></A></STRONG></DT> -<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5532"></A> -or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5535"></A> should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is -given by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5538"></A> field. +<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5537"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5540"></A> +or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5543"></A> should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is +given by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5546"></A> field. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="5541"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="5549"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies the label of the glossary in which this entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed. The list of acronyms type is given by -<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5544"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or -<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5552"></A> package +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5552"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or +<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5560"></A> package option was used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5556"></A></STRONG></DT> -<DD>Suppress the number list<A NAME="5558"></A> for +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5564"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>Suppress the number list<A NAME="5566"></A> for this entry. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>see</TT><A NAME="5560"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>see</TT><A NAME="5568"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>Cross-reference another entry. Using the -<TT>see</TT><A NAME="5563"></A> key will automatically add this entry to the +<TT>see</TT><A NAME="5571"></A> key will automatically add this entry to the glossary, but will not automatically add the cross-referenced entry. The referenced entry should be supplied as the value to this key. If you want to override the "see" tag, you can supply the new @@ -2104,15 +2115,15 @@ For example: \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, description={select group or class}} </PRE> -Note that the same applies if you are using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="5566"></A> +Note that the same applies if you are using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="5574"></A> package: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{é}lite}, description={select group or class}} </PRE> Note that in both of the above examples, you will also need to -supply the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5569"></A> key if you are using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5572"></A> -whereas <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5575"></A> is usually able to sort accented letters +supply the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5577"></A> key if you are using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5580"></A> +whereas <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5583"></A> is usually able to sort accented letters correctly. <P> @@ -2146,10 +2157,10 @@ description={a fully grown female of any bovine animal}} <P> If you are writing in a language that supports -multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5581"></A> key +multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5589"></A> key for one of them (typically the one you are most likely to use) and for the others you will need to explicitly write the plural form using -<TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="5584"></A> or <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="5587"></A> rather than using <TT>\glspl</TT>. Returning to the cow +<TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="5592"></A> or <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="5595"></A> rather than using <TT>\glspl</TT>. Returning to the cow example above, suppose you will mostly be using "cows" as the plural, but occasionally you want to use "kine" as the plural, then define the term as @@ -2166,7 +2177,7 @@ by appending a different letter, or sequence of letters, you can redefine <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> as required. However, this must be done <I>before</I> the entries are defined. For languages that don't form plurals by simply appending a suffix, all the plural forms must be -specified using the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5590"></A> key (and the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5593"></A> +specified using the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5598"></A> key (and the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5601"></A> key where necessary). <P> @@ -2200,7 +2211,7 @@ styles. Note that the parent entry will automatically be added to the glossary if any of its child entries are used in the document. If the parent entry is not referenced in the document, it will not -have a number list<A NAME="5598"></A>. +have a number list<A NAME="5606"></A>. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -2212,7 +2223,7 @@ Hierarchical Categories</A> </H4> To arrange a glossary with hierarchical categories, you need to first define the category and then define the sub-entries using the relevant -category entry as the value of the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5603"></A> key. For +category entry as the value of the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="5611"></A> key. For example, suppose I want a glossary of mathematical symbols that are divided into Greek letters and Roman letters. Then I can define the categories as follows: @@ -2226,7 +2237,7 @@ description={\nopostdesc}} <P> Note that in this example, the category entries don't need a -description so I have set the descriptions to <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="5606"></A>. +description so I have set the descriptions to <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="5614"></A>. This gives a blank description and suppresses the description terminator. @@ -2250,7 +2261,7 @@ parent=romanletter} <H4><A NAME="SECTION00032220000000000000"> Homographs</A> </H4> Sub-entries that have the same name as -the parent entry, don't need to have the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5612"></A> key. +the parent entry, don't need to have the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5620"></A> key. For example, the word "glossary" can mean a list of technical words or a collection of glosses. In both cases the plural is "glossaries". So first define the parent entry: @@ -2260,7 +2271,7 @@ description={\nopostdesc}, plural={glossaries}} </PRE> Again, the parent entry has no description, so the description -terminator needs to be suppressed using <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="5615"></A>. +terminator needs to be suppressed using <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="5623"></A>. <P> Now define the two different meanings of the word: @@ -2276,14 +2287,14 @@ sort={2}, parent={glossary}} </PRE> Note that if I reference the parent entry, the location will be -added to the parent's number list<A NAME="5617"></A>, whereas if I reference +added to the parent's number list<A NAME="5625"></A>, whereas if I reference any of the child entries, the location will be added to the child entry's number list. Note also that since the sub-entries have the -same name, the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5619"></A> key is required. +same name, the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5627"></A> key is required. <P> In the above example, the plural form for both of the child entries -is the same as the parent entry, so the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5622"></A> key was +is the same as the parent entry, so the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5630"></A> key was not required for the child entries. However, if the sub-entries have different plurals, they will need to be specified. For example: <PRE> @@ -2323,7 +2334,7 @@ file and use: where <I>filename</I> is the name of the file containing all the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> commands. The optional argument <I>type</I> is the name of the glossary to which those entries -should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="5628"></A> key has +should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="5636"></A> key has been omitted (or, more specifically, for those entries whose type has been specified by <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT>, which is what <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> uses by default). For example, suppose I have @@ -2364,10 +2375,10 @@ then (supposing I have defined a new glossary type called \loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms} </PRE> will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>acronym</TT>, if the -package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5636"></A> has been specified, or will add +package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5644"></A> has been specified, or will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>, if the -package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5645"></A> is not specified.<A NAME="tex2html22" - HREF="#foot3746"><SUP>6</SUP></A> In this instance, +package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5653"></A> is not specified.<A NAME="tex2html22" + HREF="#foot3754"><SUP>6</SUP></A> In this instance, it is better to change <TT>myacronyms.tex</TT> to: <PRE> \newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype]{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} @@ -2377,7 +2388,7 @@ and now \loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms} </PRE> will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>, -regardless of whether or not the package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5663"></A> is +regardless of whether or not the package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5671"></A> is used. <P> @@ -2397,30 +2408,30 @@ Number lists </H2> <P> -Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="5670"></A>. +Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="5678"></A>. By default, these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used (using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>). The number list can be suppressed using -the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5677"></A> package option, or an alternative counter -can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5686"></A> package option. +the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5685"></A> package option, or an alternative counter +can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5694"></A> package option. The number list is also referred to as the location -list<A NAME="3751"></A>. +list<A NAME="3759"></A>. <P> -Both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5690"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5693"></A> concatenate a +Both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5698"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5701"></A> concatenate a sequence of 3 or more consecutive pages into a range. With -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5696"></A> you can vary the minimum sequence length using -<TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT><A NAME="5699"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>n</EM><TT>}</TT> where <I>n</I> is either +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5704"></A> you can vary the minimum sequence length using +<TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT><A NAME="5707"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>n</EM><TT>}</TT> where <I>n</I> is either an integer or the keyword <TT>none</TT> which indicates that there should be no range formation. <P> Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> must be used before -<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5702"></A> and has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="5705"></A> is used. +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5710"></A> and has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="5713"></A> is used. <P> -With both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5708"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5711"></A>, you can replace +With both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5716"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5719"></A>, you can replace the separator and the closing number in the range using: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsSetSuffixF{</TT><EM>suffix</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -2434,14 +2445,14 @@ For example: \glsSetSuffixF{f.} \glsSetSuffixFF{ff.} </PRE> -Note that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5714"></A>, you will also need to +Note that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5722"></A>, you will also need to set the minimum range length to 1 if you want to change these suffixes: <PRE> \GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{1} </PRE> -Note that if you use the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5717"></A> package, you will need -to use <TT>\nohyperpage</TT><A NAME="5720"></A> in the suffix to ensure that the hyperlinks +Note that if you use the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5725"></A> package, you will need +to use <TT>\nohyperpage</TT><A NAME="5728"></A> in the suffix to ensure that the hyperlinks work correctly. For example: <PRE> \glsSetSuffixF{\nohyperpage{f.}} @@ -2450,7 +2461,7 @@ work correctly. For example: <P> Note that <TT>\glsSetSuffixF</TT> and <TT>\glsSetSuffixFF</TT> must be used -before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5723"></A> and have no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="5726"></A> is +before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5731"></A> and have no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="5734"></A> is used. <P> @@ -2468,15 +2479,15 @@ Links to Glossary Entries <P> Once you have defined a glossary entry using -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="5732"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="5740"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the document using one of the commands listed in this section. The text which appears at that point in the document when using one of these commands is referred to as the -<I>link text</I><A NAME="5735"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). The commands +<I>link text</I><A NAME="5743"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). The commands in this section also add a line to an external file that is used -by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5737"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5740"></A> to generate the relevant +by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5745"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5748"></A> to generate the relevant entry in the glossary. This information includes an -associated location that is added to the number list<A NAME="5742"></A> for that +associated location that is added to the number list<A NAME="5750"></A> for that entry. By default, the location refers to the page number. For further information on number lists, see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>. @@ -2487,7 +2498,7 @@ commands. <P> The above warning is particularly important if you are using the -<TT>glossaries</TT> package in conjunction with the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5745"></A> package. +<TT>glossaries</TT> package in conjunction with the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5753"></A> package. Instead, use one of the commands listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsnolink">Using Glossary Terms Without Links</A> (such as <TT>\glsentrytext</TT>) or provide an alternative via @@ -2499,9 +2510,9 @@ Examples: </PRE> <P> -The way the link text<A NAME="5747"></A> is displayed +The way the link text<A NAME="5755"></A> is displayed depends on <TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>. -For example, to make all link text<A NAME="5748"></A> appear in a sans-serif +For example, to make all link text<A NAME="5756"></A> appear in a sans-serif font, do: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}} @@ -2509,10 +2520,10 @@ font, do: <P> Each entry has an associated conditional referred to as the - first use flag<A NAME="5749"></A>. This determines whether <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5751"></A>, -<TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5754"></A> (and their uppercase variants) should use the -value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5757"></A> or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5760"></A> keys. Note that an -entry can be used without affecting the first use flag<A NAME="5762"></A> (for example, + first use flag<A NAME="5757"></A>. This determines whether <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5759"></A>, +<TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5762"></A> (and their uppercase variants) should use the +value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5765"></A> or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5768"></A> keys. Note that an +entry can be used without affecting the first use flag<A NAME="5770"></A> (for example, when used with <TT>\glslink</TT>). See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsunset">later</A> for commands that unset or reset this conditional. @@ -2526,17 +2537,17 @@ will place <TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> in the document point and add a line into the associated glossary file for the glossary entry given by <I>label</I>. If hyperlinks are supported, <I>text</I> will be a hyperlink to the relevant line in the -glossary. (Note that this command doesn't affect the first use flag<A NAME="5763"></A>: -use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="5765"></A> instead.) The optional argument <I>options</I> +glossary. (Note that this command doesn't affect the first use flag<A NAME="5771"></A>: +use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="5773"></A> instead.) The optional argument <I>options</I> must be a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list which can take any of the following keys: <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="5768"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="5776"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies how to format the associated location number for this entry in the glossary. This -value is equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5771"></A> encap value, and (as +value is equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5779"></A> encap value, and (as with <TT>\index</TT>) the value needs to be the name of a command <I>without</I> the initial backslash. As with <TT>\index</TT>, the characters <code>(</code> and <code>)</code> can also be used to specify the @@ -2555,15 +2566,15 @@ and use that command. <P> In this document, the standard formats refer to the standard text -block commands such as <TT>\textbf</TT><A NAME="5774"></A> or <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="5777"></A> or any of the +block commands such as <TT>\textbf</TT><A NAME="5782"></A> or <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="5785"></A> or any of the commands listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">3</A>. <P> -If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5783"></A> instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5786"></A>, you +If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5791"></A> instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5794"></A>, you must specify any non-standard formats that you want to use -with the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="5789"></A> key using -<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT><A NAME="5792"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>. So if you use -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5795"></A> with the above example, you would need to add: +with the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="5797"></A> key using +<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT><A NAME="5800"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>. So if you use +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5803"></A> with the above example, you would need to add: <PRE> \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textbfem} </PRE> @@ -2572,13 +2583,13 @@ with the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="5789"></A> key using Note that unlike <TT>\index</TT>, you can't have anything following the command name, such as an asterisk or arguments. If you want to cross-reference another entry, either -use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="5798"></A> key when you define the entry or use -<TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="5801"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">later</A>). +use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="5806"></A> key when you define the entry or use +<TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="5809"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">later</A>). <P> If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the -hyperlinked location, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT><A NAME="5804"></A> (provided by the -<TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5807"></A> package) as the locations may not refer to a page +hyperlinked location, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT><A NAME="5812"></A> (provided by the +<TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="5815"></A> package) as the locations may not refer to a page number. Instead, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides number formats listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">3</A>. @@ -2587,38 +2598,38 @@ formats listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">table </A><A <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> <A NAME="tab:hyperxx"></A> -<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="1571"></A> +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="1579"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 3:</STRONG> Predefined Hyperlinked Location Formats</CAPTION> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="5814"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="5822"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">serif hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersf</TT><A NAME="5817"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersf</TT><A NAME="5825"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">sans-serif hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypertt</TT><A NAME="5820"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypertt</TT><A NAME="5828"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">monospaced hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperbf</TT><A NAME="5823"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperbf</TT><A NAME="5831"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">bold hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypermd</TT><A NAME="5826"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypermd</TT><A NAME="5834"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">medium weight hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperit</TT><A NAME="5829"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperit</TT><A NAME="5837"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">italic hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersl</TT><A NAME="5832"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersl</TT><A NAME="5840"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">slanted hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperup</TT><A NAME="5835"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperup</TT><A NAME="5843"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">upright hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersc</TT><A NAME="5838"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersc</TT><A NAME="5846"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">small caps hyperlink</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperemph</TT><A NAME="5841"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperemph</TT><A NAME="5849"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">emphasized hyperlink</TD> </TR> </TABLE> @@ -2629,7 +2640,7 @@ Predefined Hyperlinked Location Formats</CAPTION> <BR> <P> -Note that if the <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="5844"></A> command hasn't been defined, +Note that if the <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="5852"></A> command hasn't been defined, the <TT>hyper</TT><I>xx</I> formats are equivalent to the analogous <TT>text</TT><I>xx</I> font commands (and <TT>hyperemph</TT> is equivalent to <TT>emph</TT>). If you want to @@ -2640,9 +2651,9 @@ command called, say, <TT>\hyperbsf</TT>: <PRE> \newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}} </PRE> -and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="5847"></A> +and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="5855"></A> key. -Remember that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5850"></A>, you will need to add +Remember that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5858"></A>, you will need to add this to the list of location attributes: <PRE> \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbsf} @@ -2650,7 +2661,7 @@ this to the list of location attributes: <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5853"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5861"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies which counter to use for this location. This overrides the default counter used by this entry. (See also @@ -2658,7 +2669,7 @@ used by this entry. (See also <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="5856"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="5864"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a boolean key which can be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry in the glossary. (Note that setting <TT>hyper=true</TT> will have no @@ -2685,13 +2696,13 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="5858"></A> -is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5860"></A> and -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5863"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="5866"></A>. If the entry has been marked as having -been used<A NAME="5868"></A>, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5870"></A> key will be used, otherwise -the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5873"></A> key will be used. -On completion, <TT>\gls</TT> will mark the entry's first use flag<A NAME="5875"></A> as +is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="5866"></A> +is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5868"></A> and +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5871"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="5874"></A>. If the entry has been marked as having +been used<A NAME="5876"></A>, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5878"></A> key will be used, otherwise +the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5881"></A> key will be used. +On completion, <TT>\gls</TT> will mark the entry's first use flag<A NAME="5883"></A> as used. <P> @@ -2719,7 +2730,7 @@ can be changed (see <P> The first optional argument <I>options</I> is the same as the optional -argument to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="5877"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also +argument to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="5885"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also have a starred version that disable the hyperlink. <P> @@ -2735,14 +2746,14 @@ There are also analogous plural forms: <TT>\GLSpl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5880"></A> and -<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5883"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first +These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5888"></A> and +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5891"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first defined. As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable the hyperlink. <P> -Note that <TT>\glslink</TT> doesn't use or affect the first use flag<A NAME="5885"></A>, -nor does it use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5887"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5890"></A> (see +Note that <TT>\glslink</TT> doesn't use or affect the first use flag<A NAME="5893"></A>, +nor does it use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5895"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5898"></A> (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">later</A>). Instead, you can use: <BR> @@ -2751,10 +2762,10 @@ Instead, you can use: <BR> <BR> This behaves in the same way as <TT>\gls</TT>, except that it uses -<I>link text</I> instead of the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5893"></A> -or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5896"></A> key. (Note that this command always sets -<I>insert</I> to nothing.) This command affects the first use flag<A NAME="5898"></A>, -and uses <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5900"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5903"></A>. +<I>link text</I> instead of the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5901"></A> +or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5904"></A> key. (Note that this command always sets +<I>insert</I> to nothing.) This command affects the first use flag<A NAME="5906"></A>, +and uses <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5908"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5911"></A>. <P> The command: @@ -2762,12 +2773,12 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5906"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5909"></A> key and does not affect the -first use flag<A NAME="5911"></A>. +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5914"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5917"></A> key and does not affect the +first use flag<A NAME="5919"></A>. Unlike <TT>\gls</TT>, the inserted text <I>insert</I> is always appended to the link text since <TT>\glstext</TT> doesn't -use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5913"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5916"></A>. (The same is +use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="5921"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="5924"></A>. (The same is true for all the following commands described in this section.) <P> @@ -2789,10 +2800,10 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5919"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5922"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5927"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="5930"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not affect the -first use flag<A NAME="5924"></A>. +first use flag<A NAME="5932"></A>. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -2813,8 +2824,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5926"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5929"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5934"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5937"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. @@ -2837,8 +2848,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5932"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5935"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5940"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5943"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. @@ -2861,13 +2872,13 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5938"></A> except that it always uses the value of the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5941"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5946"></A> except that it always uses the value of the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5949"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5944"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5952"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5947"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5955"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -2888,13 +2899,13 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5950"></A> except that it always uses the value of the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5953"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5958"></A> except that it always uses the value of the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5961"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5956"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5964"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5959"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5967"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -2915,14 +2926,14 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5962"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5965"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="5970"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5973"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this -command and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5968"></A> key contains commands, you will +command and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5976"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5971"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5979"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -2951,19 +2962,19 @@ Changing the format of the link text </H3> <P> -The format of the link text<A NAME="5976"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5978"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5981"></A> +The format of the link text<A NAME="5984"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="5986"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="5989"></A> and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands: <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>, which is used the -first time a glossary entry is used<A NAME="5983"></A> in the text and +first time a glossary entry is used<A NAME="5991"></A> in the text and <TT>\glsdisplay</TT>, which is used subsequently. Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or -plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5985"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5988"></A>, -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5991"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="5994"></A> keys (set when the term was +plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5993"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="5996"></A>, +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="5999"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6002"></A> keys (set when the term was defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's -description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5997"></A> or -<TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="6000"></A> keys); the third +description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6005"></A> or +<TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="6008"></A> keys); the third argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6003"></A> or <TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="6006"></A> keys) and the fourth argument is the additional text +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6011"></A> or <TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="6014"></A> keys) and the fourth argument is the additional text supplied in the final optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT> or <TT>\glspl</TT> (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> simply @@ -2972,7 +2983,7 @@ The remaining arguments are ignored. <P> If required, you can access the label for the given entry via -<TT>\glslabel</TT><A NAME="6009"></A>, so it is possible to use +<TT>\glslabel</TT><A NAME="6017"></A>, so it is possible to use this label in the definition of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> to supply additional information using any of the commands described in @@ -2981,19 +2992,19 @@ Without Links</A>, if required. <P> Note that <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> are not used -by <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6012"></A>. If you want to supply your own link text, you -need to use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6015"></A> instead. +by <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6020"></A>. If you want to supply your own link text, you +need to use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6023"></A> instead. <P> For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and -units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6018"></A> key to store the unit: +units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6026"></A> key to store the unit: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance, description={The length between two points}, symbol={km}} </PRE> and now suppose you want <code>\gls{distance}</code> to produce -"distance (km)" on first use<A NAME="6020"></A>, then you can redefine +"distance (km)" on first use<A NAME="6028"></A>, then you can redefine <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} @@ -3006,8 +3017,8 @@ the two points" -- but in this instance it would be better not to use a contraction). <P> -Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="6021"></A> will be formatted according -to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="6023"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say: +Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="6029"></A> will be formatted according +to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="6031"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say: <PRE> \renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}} \renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} @@ -3017,8 +3028,8 @@ then <code>\gls{distance}</code> will produce "<B>distance (km)</B>". <P> If you have multiple glossaries, changing <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> will change the way entries for all of the -glossaries appear when using the commands <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6027"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6030"></A>, their -uppercase variants and <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6033"></A>. If you only +glossaries appear when using the commands <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6035"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6038"></A>, their +uppercase variants and <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6041"></A>. If you only want the change to affect entries for a given glossary, then you need to use <BR> @@ -3035,7 +3046,7 @@ instead of redefining <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</T <P> Both <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> take two arguments: the first (which is optional) is the glossary's label<A NAME="tex2html24" - HREF="#foot3779"><SUP>7</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be + HREF="#foot3787"><SUP>7</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be displayed when it is invoked using commands <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT>, their uppercase variants and <TT>\glsdisp</TT>. This is similar to the way <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> was redefined above. @@ -3043,7 +3054,7 @@ redefined above. <P> For example, suppose you have created a new glossary called <TT>notation</TT> and you want to change the way the entry is -displayed on first use<A NAME="6035"></A> so that it includes the symbol, you can +displayed on first use<A NAME="6043"></A> so that it includes the symbol, you can do: <PRE> \defglsdisplayfirst[notation]{#1#4 (denoted #3)} @@ -3061,10 +3072,10 @@ will be displayed as: "set (denoted <I>S</I>)" (similarly for <TT>\glspl</TT> and the uppercase variants). <P> -Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6040"></A> key, you need to use a +Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6048"></A> key, you need to use a glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear -in the link text<A NAME="6042"></A>, you will have to disable the +in the link text<A NAME="6050"></A>, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> of these keys and protect fragile commands. <P> @@ -3077,10 +3088,10 @@ Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries</A> </H3> <P> -If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6047"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="6050"></A> packages prior to -loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6054"></A> -and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6057"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks -to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6060"></A> +If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6055"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="6058"></A> packages prior to +loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6062"></A> +and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6065"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks +to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6068"></A> option has been set to <TT>false</TT>. You can disable or enable links using: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsdisablehyper</TT> @@ -3093,8 +3104,8 @@ and <BR> respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands within a group. Note that you should only use <TT>\glsenablehyper</TT> -if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="6063"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="6066"></A> have been -defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6069"></A> package). +if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="6071"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="6074"></A> have been +defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6077"></A> package). <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -3113,8 +3124,8 @@ generating any text at that point in the document using: <BR><TT>\glsadd[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6075"></A>, only it doesn't produce -any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6078"></A> key +This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6083"></A>, only it doesn't produce +any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6086"></A> key available in <I>options</I> but all the other options that can be used with <TT>\glslink</TT> can be passed to <TT>\glsadd</TT>). For example, to add a page range to the glossary number list for the @@ -3132,7 +3143,7 @@ To add all entries that have been defined, use: <BR> <BR> The optional argument is the same as for <TT>\glsadd</TT>, except -there is also a key <TT>types</TT><A NAME="6081"></A> which can be +there is also a key <TT>types</TT><A NAME="6089"></A> which can be used to specify which glossaries to use. This should be a comma separated list. For example, if you only want to add all the entries belonging to the list of acronyms (specified by @@ -3161,7 +3172,7 @@ glossary: <P> <OL> -<LI>You can use commands such as <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6087"></A> in the +<LI>You can use commands such as <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6095"></A> in the entries description. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{apple}{name=apple, @@ -3169,7 +3180,7 @@ description={firm, round fruit. See also \gls{pear}}} </PRE> Note that with this method, if you don't use the cross-referenced term in the glossary, you will need two runs of -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6090"></A>: +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6098"></A>: <PRE> latex filename makeglossaries filename @@ -3181,14 +3192,14 @@ latex filename <P> </LI> <LI>As described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">earlier</A>, -you can use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6093"></A> key when you define the entry. For +you can use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6101"></A> key when you define the entry. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin series}, description={Series expansion}, see={TaylorsTheorem}} </PRE> -Note that in this case, the entry with the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6096"></A> key will +Note that in this case, the entry with the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6104"></A> key will automatically be added to the glossary, but the cross-referenced entry won't. You therefore need to ensure that you use the cross-referenced term with the commands described in @@ -3198,7 +3209,7 @@ Without Generating Text. <P> You can optionally override the "see" tag using square brackets -at the start of the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6099"></A> value. For example: +at the start of the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6107"></A> value. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin series}, description={Series expansion}, @@ -3227,9 +3238,9 @@ by <I>xr label list</I>) to the glossary. <P> In both cases 2 and 3 above, the cross-referenced information appears -in the number list<A NAME="6101"></A>, whereas in case 1, the cross-referenced +in the number list<A NAME="6109"></A>, whereas in case 1, the cross-referenced information appears in the description. In cases 2 and 3, the -default text for the "see" tag is given by <TT>\seename</TT><A NAME="6103"></A>. +default text for the "see" tag is given by <TT>\seename</TT><A NAME="6111"></A>. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -3246,7 +3257,7 @@ Using Glossary Terms Without Links The commands described in this section display entry details without adding any information to the glossary. They don't use <TT>\glstextformat</TT>, they don't have any optional arguments, -they don't affect the first use flag<A NAME="6108"></A> and, apart from <TT>\glshyperlink</TT><A NAME="6110"></A>, they don't produce +they don't affect the first use flag<A NAME="6116"></A> and, apart from <TT>\glshyperlink</TT><A NAME="6118"></A>, they don't produce hyperlinks. <P> @@ -3255,7 +3266,7 @@ hyperlinks. <BR><TT>\Glsentryname{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> These commands display the name of the glossary entry given by -<I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6113"></A> key. +<I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6121"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryname</TT> makes the first letter uppercase. <P> @@ -3264,7 +3275,7 @@ These commands display the name of the glossary entry given by <BR><TT>\Glsentrytext{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> These commands display the subsequent use text for the glossary entry -given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6116"></A> key. +given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6124"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentrytext</TT> makes the first letter uppercase. <P> @@ -3273,7 +3284,7 @@ given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6116"></A> key. <BR><TT>\Glsentryplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> These commands display the subsequent use plural text for the glossary -entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6119"></A> key. +entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6127"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryplural</TT> makes the first letter uppercase. <P> @@ -3281,8 +3292,8 @@ entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6119">< <TT>\glsentryfirst{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR><TT>\Glsentryfirst{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> -These commands display the first use text<A NAME="6121"></A> for the glossary entry -given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6123"></A> key. +These commands display the first use text<A NAME="6129"></A> for the glossary entry +given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6131"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryfirst</TT> makes the first letter uppercase. <P> @@ -3290,9 +3301,9 @@ given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6123"></A> key <TT>\glsentryfirstplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR><TT>\Glsentryfirstplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> -These commands display the plural form of the first use text<A NAME="6125"></A> for the +These commands display the plural form of the first use text<A NAME="6133"></A> for the glossary entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the -<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6127"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryfirstplural</TT> makes the first +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6135"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryfirstplural</TT> makes the first letter uppercase. <P> @@ -3335,7 +3346,7 @@ These commands display the plural symbol for the glossary entry given by This command provides a hyperlink to the glossary entry given by <I>label</I> <B>but does not add any information to the glossary file</B>. The link text is given by -<TT>\glsentryname</TT><A NAME="6130"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> by default, but can be overridden +<TT>\glsentryname</TT><A NAME="6138"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> by default, but can be overridden using the optional argument. If you use <TT>\glshyperlink</TT>, you need to ensure that the relevant entry has been added to the glossary using any of the @@ -3365,15 +3376,15 @@ Displaying a glossary The command <TT>\printglossaries</TT> will display all the glossaries in the order in which they were defined. Note that no glossaries will appear until -you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6136"></A> -or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6139"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6142"></A> (as +you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6144"></A> +or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6147"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6150"></A> (as described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the Associated Glossary Files</A>). If the glossary still does not appear after you re-LaTeX your document, check the -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6145"></A>/<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6148"></A> log files to see if there is a +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6153"></A>/<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6156"></A> log files to see if there is a problem. Remember that you also need to use the command -<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6151"></A> in the preamble to enable the glossaries. +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6159"></A> in the preamble to enable the glossaries. <P> An individual glossary can be displayed using: @@ -3384,7 +3395,7 @@ An individual glossary can be displayed using: where <I>options</I> is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list of options. The following keys are available: <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="6154"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="6162"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The value of this key specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: @@ -3394,37 +3405,37 @@ glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="6157"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="6165"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the glossary's title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was defined). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="6160"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="6168"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the title -to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="6168"></A> package +to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="6176"></A> package option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="6172"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="6180"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies which glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect -of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="6180"></A> package option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="6184"></A>. +of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="6188"></A> package option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="6192"></A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6187"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6195"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding -the effect of the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6195"></A> package option. This -key has the same syntax as the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6204"></A> package +the effect of the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6203"></A> package option. This +key has the same syntax as the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6212"></A> package option, described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:pkgopts">earlier</A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="6208"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="6216"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>Unlike the package option of the same name, this key is a boolean key. If true (<code>nonumberlist=true</code>) the numberlist is suppressed for this glossary. If false (<code>nonumberlist=false</code>) the numberlist is @@ -3489,12 +3500,12 @@ the entry name. This command is always used regardless of the glossary style. By default, <TT>\glsnamefont</TT> simply displays its argument in whatever the surrounding font happens to be. This means that in the list-like glossary styles (defined in the -<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="6214"></A> style file) the name will appear in bold, since +<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="6222"></A> style file) the name will appear in bold, since the name is placed in the optional argument of <TT>\item</TT>, whereas in -the tabular styles (defined in the <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="6217"></A> and -<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="6220"></A> style files) the name will appear in the +the tabular styles (defined in the <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="6225"></A> and +<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="6228"></A> style files) the name will appear in the normal font. The hierarchical glossary styles (defined in the -<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="6223"></A> style file) also set the name in bold. +<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="6231"></A> style file) also set the name in bold. <P> For example, suppose you want all the entry names to appear in @@ -3515,13 +3526,13 @@ Xindy </H3> <P> -If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6229"></A> to sort the glossary, you -must use the package option <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6237"></A>: +If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6237"></A> to sort the glossary, you +must use the package option <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6245"></A>: <PRE> \usepackage[xindy]{glossaries} </PRE> This ensures that the glossary information is written in -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6241"></A> syntax. +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6249"></A> syntax. <P> The section @@ -3529,10 +3540,10 @@ The section Files</A> covers how to use the external indexing application. This section covers the commands provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package that allow you to adjust the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6245"></A> style file (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="6248"></A>) and parameters. +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6253"></A> style file (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="6256"></A>) and parameters. <P> -To assist writing information to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6250"></A> style +To assist writing information to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6258"></A> style file, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides the following commands: <BR> @@ -3546,7 +3557,7 @@ when written to a file.) <P> In addition, if you are using a package that makes the double -quote character active (e.g. <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="6254"></A>) you can use: +quote character active (e.g. <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="6262"></A>) you can use: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsquote{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> @@ -3557,13 +3568,13 @@ This document assumes that the double quote character has not been made active, so the examples just use <code>"</code> for clarity. <P> -If you want greater control over the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6257"></A> style file than +If you want greater control over the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6265"></A> style file than is available through the LaTeX commands provided by the -<TT>glossaries</TT> package, you will need to edit the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6261"></A> +<TT>glossaries</TT> package, you will need to edit the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6269"></A> style file. In -which case, you must use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6264"></A> to prevent the style file from +which case, you must use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6272"></A> to prevent the style file from being overwritten by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. For additional -information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6268"></A>, read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6271"></A> +information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6276"></A>, read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6279"></A> documentation. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -3573,14 +3584,14 @@ documentation. <H4><A NAME="SECTION00038210000000000000"> Language and Encodings</A> </H4> -When you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6277"></A>, you need to specify the language +When you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6285"></A>, you need to specify the language and encoding used (unless you have written your own custom -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6280"></A> style file that defines the relevant alphabet -and sort rules). If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6283"></A>, +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6288"></A> style file that defines the relevant alphabet +and sort rules). If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6291"></A>, this information is obtained from the document's auxiliary -(<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="6286"></A>) file. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package attempts to +(<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="6294"></A>) file. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package attempts to find the root language, but in the event that it gets it wrong or if -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6289"></A> doesn't support that language, then you can +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6297"></A> doesn't support that language, then you can specify the language using: <BR> <BR> @@ -3595,8 +3606,8 @@ setting will only be applied to the glossary given by <I>glossary type</I>. <P> -If the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="6292"></A> package is used, the encoding will be -obtained from the value of <TT>\inputencodingname</TT><A NAME="6295"></A>. +If the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="6300"></A> package is used, the encoding will be +obtained from the value of <TT>\inputencodingname</TT><A NAME="6303"></A>. Alternatively, you can specify the encoding using: <BR> <BR> @@ -3618,19 +3629,19 @@ For example: </PRE> <P> -If you write your own custom <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6298"></A> style file that +If you write your own custom <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6306"></A> style file that includes the language settings, you need to set the language to nothing: <PRE> \GlsSetXdyLanguage{} </PRE> -(and remember to use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6301"></A> to prevent the style file from +(and remember to use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6309"></A> to prevent the style file from being overwritten). <P> The commands <TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT> and <TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT> -have no effect if you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6304"></A>. If -you call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6307"></A> without <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6310"></A> you +have no effect if you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6312"></A>. If +you call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6315"></A> without <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6318"></A> you need to remember to set the language and encoding using the <TT>-L</TT> and <TT>-C</TT> switches. @@ -3644,9 +3655,9 @@ Locations and Number lists</A> </H4> <P> -The most likely attributes used in the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6316"></A> -key (<TT>textrm</TT><A NAME="6319"></A>, <TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="6322"></A> etc) are automatically added -to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6325"></A> style file, but if you want to use another +The most likely attributes used in the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6324"></A> +key (<TT>textrm</TT><A NAME="6327"></A>, <TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="6330"></A> etc) are automatically added +to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6333"></A> style file, but if you want to use another attribute, you need to add it using: <BR> <BR> @@ -3654,24 +3665,24 @@ attribute, you need to add it using: <BR> <BR> where <I>name</I> is the name of the attribute, as used in -the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6328"></A> key. For example, suppose I want a +the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6336"></A> key. For example, suppose I want a bold, italic, hyperlinked location. I first need to define a command that will do this: <PRE> \newcommand*{\hyperbfit}[1]{\textit{\hyperbf{#1}}} </PRE> -but with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6331"></A>, I also need to add this as an allowed +but with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6339"></A>, I also need to add this as an allowed attribute: <PRE> \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbfit} </PRE> <P> -Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6334"></A> is -used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6337"></A> is omitted. +Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6342"></A> is +used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6345"></A> is omitted. <P> -<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6340"></A>. +<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6348"></A>. <P> If the location numbers don't get expanded to a simple Arabic or @@ -3680,8 +3691,8 @@ you need to add a location style in the appropriate format. <P> For example, suppose you want the page numbers written as words -rather than digits and you use the <TT>fmtcount</TT><A NAME="6343"></A> package to -do this. You can redefine <TT>\thepage</TT><A NAME="6346"></A> as follows: +rather than digits and you use the <TT>fmtcount</TT><A NAME="6351"></A> package to +do this. You can redefine <TT>\thepage</TT><A NAME="6354"></A> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\thepage}{\Numberstring{page}} </PRE> @@ -3695,32 +3706,32 @@ define a new location that has that form: </PRE> Note that it's necessary to use <TT>\space</TT> to indicate that spaces also appear in the format, since, unlike T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X, -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6349"></A> doesn't ignore spaces after control sequences. +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6357"></A> doesn't ignore spaces after control sequences. <P> -Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6352"></A> is -used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6355"></A> is omitted. +Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6360"></A> is +used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6363"></A> is omitted. <P> -<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6358"></A>. +<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6366"></A>. <P> -In the number list<A NAME="6360"></A>, the locations are sorted according to +In the number list<A NAME="6368"></A>, the locations are sorted according to type. The default ordering is: <TT>roman-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. i), <TT>arabic-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. 1), <TT>arabic-section-numbers</TT> (e.g. 1.1 if the compositor is a full stop or 1-1 if the compositor is a hyphen<A NAME="tex2html26" - HREF="#foot3896"><SUP>8</SUP></A>), + HREF="#foot3904"><SUP>8</SUP></A>), <TT>alpha-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. a), <TT>Roman-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. I), <TT>Alpha-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. A), <TT>Appendix-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. A.1 if the Alpha compositor is a full stop or A-1 if the Alpha compositor is a hyphen<A NAME="tex2html27" - HREF="#foot3897"><SUP>9</SUP></A>), + HREF="#foot3905"><SUP>9</SUP></A>), user defined location names (as specified by -<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT><A NAME="6368"></A> in the order in which they were defined), +<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT><A NAME="6376"></A> in the order in which they were defined), <TT>see</TT> (cross-referenced entries). This ordering can be changed using: <BR> @@ -3746,14 +3757,14 @@ For example: <P> Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder</TT> has no effect if -<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6371"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6374"></A> is omitted. +<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6379"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6382"></A> is omitted. <P> <TT>\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder</TT> must be used before -<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6377"></A>. +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6385"></A>. <P> -If a number list<A NAME="6379"></A> consists of a sequence of consecutive +If a number list<A NAME="6387"></A> consists of a sequence of consecutive numbers, the range will be concatenated. The number of consecutive locations that causes a range formation defaults to 2, but can be changed using: @@ -3767,16 +3778,16 @@ For example: \GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{3} </PRE> The argument may also be the keyword <TT>none</TT>, to indicate that -there should be no range formations. See the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6381"></A> +there should be no range formations. See the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6389"></A> manual for further details on range formations. <P> -Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6384"></A> -is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6387"></A> is omitted. +Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6392"></A> +is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6395"></A> is omitted. <P> <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> must be used before -<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6390"></A>. +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6398"></A>. <P> See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A> for @@ -3793,7 +3804,7 @@ Glossary Groups</A> The glossary is divided into groups according to the first letter of the sort key. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package also adds a number group by default, unless you suppress it in the -<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6402"></A> package option. For example: +<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6410"></A> package option. For example: <PRE> \usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries} </PRE> @@ -3809,11 +3820,11 @@ Roman alphabet, you can change this using <P> Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits</TT> has no effect if -<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6406"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6409"></A> is omitted. +<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6414"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6417"></A> is omitted. <P> <TT>\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits</TT> must be used before -<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6412"></A>. +<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6420"></A>. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -3837,10 +3848,10 @@ where <I>name</I> is the label to assign to this glossary. The arguments input and output files for that glossary, <I>title</I> is the default title for this new glossary and the final optional argument <I>counter</I> specifies which counter to use for the associated number -lists<A NAME="6417"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). The +lists<A NAME="6425"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). The first optional argument specifies the extension for the -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6419"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6422"></A> transcript file (this -information is only used by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6425"></A> which picks up +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6427"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6430"></A> transcript file (this +information is only used by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6433"></A> which picks up the information from the auxiliary file). <P> @@ -3849,20 +3860,20 @@ Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as: \newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} </PRE> so it can be identified by the label <TT>main</TT> (unless the -<TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="6433"></A> package option is used). Using the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6442"></A> package option is equivalent to: +<TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="6441"></A> package option is used). Using the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6450"></A> package option is equivalent to: <PRE> \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} </PRE> so it can be identified by the label <TT>acronym</TT>. If you are -not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6451"></A> option has been used, you +not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6459"></A> option has been used, you can identify the list of acronyms by the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT> which is set to -<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6460"></A> option has been used, +<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6468"></A> option has been used, otherwise it is set to <TT>main</TT>. <P> -All glossaries must be defined before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6464"></A> to +All glossaries must be defined before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6472"></A> to ensure that the relevant output files are opened. <P> @@ -3879,7 +3890,7 @@ Acronyms <P> You may have noticed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary Entries</A> that when you specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when -the term is first used<A NAME="6469"></A> in the document. This provides a useful +the term is first used<A NAME="6477"></A> in the document. This provides a useful means to define acronyms. For convenience, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package defines the command: <BR> @@ -3889,7 +3900,7 @@ defines the command: By default, this is equivalent to: <P> <TT> -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{type=<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="6472"></A>, +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{type=<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="6480"></A>, <BR> name=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}, <BR> @@ -3905,9 +3916,9 @@ firstplural={</TT> <I>long</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix\space</TT> (</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT>)}, <BR></TT> <I>key-val list</I><TT>}</TT> <P> -As mentioned in the previous section, the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="6475"></A> +As mentioned in the previous section, the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="6483"></A> is the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If -the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6483"></A> package option has been used, this will be +the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6491"></A> package option has been used, this will be <TT>acronym</TT>, otherwise it will be <TT>main</TT>. The acronyms can then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. @@ -3918,7 +3929,7 @@ if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using <TT>\loadglsentries[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT>, the optional argument <I>type</I> will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the type as <code>type=\glsdefaulttype</code> in the optional argument to -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6487"></A>. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:loadglsentries">earlier</A> for details. +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6495"></A>. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:loadglsentries">earlier</A> for details. <P> For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: @@ -3936,26 +3947,26 @@ plural={IDNs}, firstplural={identification numbers (IDNs)}} </PRE> so <code>\gls{idn}</code> will produce "identification number (IDN)" on -first use<A NAME="6489"></A> and "IDN" on subsequent uses. +first use<A NAME="6497"></A> and "IDN" on subsequent uses. <P> This section describes acronyms that have been defined using <TT>\newacronym</TT>. If you prefer to define all your acronyms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> explicitly, then you should skip this section -and ignore the package options: <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6496"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6505"></A>, -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="6514"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6523"></A> and <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6532"></A>, as these -options change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6536"></A> for common acronym +and ignore the package options: <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6504"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6513"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="6522"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6531"></A> and <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6540"></A>, as these +options change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6544"></A> for common acronym formats as well as the way that the link text is displayed (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>). -Likewise you should ignore the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="6544"></A> +Likewise you should ignore the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="6552"></A> and the new commands described in this section, such as <TT>\acrshort</TT>, as they vary according to the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6548"></A>. +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6556"></A>. <P> -If you use any of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6556"></A>, -<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6565"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6574"></A> or -<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6583"></A>, the acronyms will be displayed in the document +If you use any of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6564"></A>, +<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6573"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6582"></A> or +<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6591"></A>, the acronyms will be displayed in the document using: <BR> <BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -3966,16 +3977,16 @@ and <BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -where <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> is applied on first use<A NAME="6586"></A> and +where <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> is applied on first use<A NAME="6594"></A> and <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is applied on subsequent use. Note that if you don't use any of the above package options, changing the definition of <TT>\acronymfont</TT> or <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> will have no effect. In this case, the recommended route is to use either the -<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6593"></A> or the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6602"></A> package option and +<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6601"></A> or the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6610"></A> package option and redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT> and <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> as required. -(The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6611"></A> option sets the default plural suffix in an +(The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6619"></A> option sets the default plural suffix in an upright font to cancel the effect of <TT>\textsc</TT>, whereas -<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6620"></A> sets the suffix in the surrounding font.) +<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6628"></A> sets the suffix in the surrounding font.) For example, if you want acronyms in a normal font on first use and emphasized on subsequent use, do: <PRE> @@ -3983,20 +3994,20 @@ emphasized on subsequent use, do: \renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{#1} \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} </PRE> -(Note that it is for this reason that the <TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="6624"></A> package +(Note that it is for this reason that the <TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="6632"></A> package is not automatically loaded when selecting the -<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6632"></A> package option.) +<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6640"></A> package option.) <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">Table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">4</A> lists the package options that govern -the acronym styles and how the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="6639"></A> keys are used +the acronym styles and how the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="6647"></A> keys are used to store <I>long</I> (the long form) and <I>abbrv</I> (the short -form). Note that the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6647"></A> option redefines +form). Note that the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6655"></A> option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT> so that it sets its argument using <TT>\textsc</TT> (so you should use lower case characters in <I>abbrv</I>) and the -<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6656"></A> option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use +<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6664"></A> option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use <TT>\textsmaller</TT>,<A NAME="tex2html28" - HREF="#foot3827"><SUP>10</SUP></A> otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply displays its argument in + HREF="#foot3835"><SUP>10</SUP></A> otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply displays its argument in the surrounding font. <P> @@ -4005,54 +4016,54 @@ the surrounding font. <A NAME="tab:acronymsettings"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="3828"></A> +<A NAME="3836"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 4:</STRONG> Package options governing <TT>\newacronym</TT> and how the information is stored in the keys for <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></CAPTION> <TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Package Option </B></TH> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="6661"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="6664"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6667"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6670"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="6669"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="6672"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6675"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6678"></A> key</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6678"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6687"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6686"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6695"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6696"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6705"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6704"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6713"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6714"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6722"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6723"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6731"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6732"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6740"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6741"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6749"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6750"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6758"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> @@ -4094,14 +4105,14 @@ to override the defaults. For example: \newacronym[\glslongpluralkey={diagonal matrices}]{dm}{DM}{diagonal matrix} </PRE> -If the first use<A NAME="6754"></A> uses the plural form, <code>\glspl{dm}</code> will +If the first use<A NAME="6762"></A> uses the plural form, <code>\glspl{dm}</code> will display: diagonal matrices (DMs). <P> -Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6761"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6770"></A>, -<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6779"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6788"></A> -and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6797"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6801"></A> and -<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6804"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>) +Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6769"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6778"></A>, +<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6787"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6796"></A> +and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6805"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6809"></A> and +<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6812"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>) to change the way the link text is displayed. This means that these package options only work for the glossary type given by <TT>\acronymtype</TT>. If you have multiple lists of acronyms, you @@ -4110,9 +4121,9 @@ glossary type. <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6812"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6821"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6820"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6829"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -When these two package options are used together, the first use<A NAME="6824"></A> displays +When these two package options are used together, the first use<A NAME="6832"></A> displays the entry as: <BR> <BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -4128,50 +4139,50 @@ optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT> or their uppercase variants. <P> -In this case, the long form is stored in the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6826"></A> key. +In this case, the long form is stored in the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6834"></A> key. This means that the long form will not be displayed in the list of acronyms unless you use a glossary style that displays the entry's -symbol (for example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="6829"></A> style). Entries will +symbol (for example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="6837"></A> style). Entries will be sorted according to the short form. <P> Note also that when these two package options are used (in the given order), the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the -<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="6837"></A> option using -<A NAME="6846"></A><A NAME="6853"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so +<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="6845"></A> option using +<A NAME="6854"></A><A NAME="6861"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6860"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6868"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6869"></A> package option always displays the expanded -form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6878"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6887"></A> or -<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6896"></A>. Both first use<A NAME="6899"></A> and subsequent use displays the +The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6877"></A> package option always displays the expanded +form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6886"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="6895"></A> or +<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="6904"></A>. Both first use<A NAME="6907"></A> and subsequent use displays the entry in the form: <BR> <BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> <BR> <BR> -If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6906"></A> package option is also used, the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6910"></A> key is set to the long form, otherwise the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6913"></A> key is set to the short form and the -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="6916"></A> key is set to the long form. In both -cases the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6919"></A> is set to the short form. Therefore, -if you use the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6927"></A> package option and you want +If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6914"></A> package option is also used, the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6918"></A> key is set to the long form, otherwise the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6921"></A> key is set to the short form and the +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="6924"></A> key is set to the long form. In both +cases the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6927"></A> is set to the short form. Therefore, +if you use the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6935"></A> package option and you want the short form to appear in the list of acronyms, you will need to use a glossary style that displays the entry's symbol (for -example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="6931"></A> style). Entries will be sorted -according to the long form if the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6938"></A> option +example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="6939"></A> style). Entries will be sorted +according to the long form if the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6946"></A> option is used, otherwise they will be sorted according to the -short form (unless overridden by the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="6942"></A> key in -the optional argument of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6945"></A>). +short form (unless overridden by the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="6950"></A> key in +the optional argument of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6953"></A>). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6953"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6961"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="6956"></A> as: +This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="6964"></A> as: <BR> <BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> @@ -4183,34 +4194,34 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <BR> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="6964"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="6972"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> Note that with this option, you need to specify the description -using the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6966"></A> key in the optional argument -of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6969"></A>. When this option is used without -the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6977"></A> or <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6986"></A> options, the name field +using the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6974"></A> key in the optional argument +of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="6977"></A>. When this option is used without +the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="6985"></A> or <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="6994"></A> options, the name field is specified as -<TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="6990"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>. This -defaults to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="6993"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}</TT>, which means that the +<TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="6998"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>. This +defaults to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7001"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}</TT>, which means that the long form will not appear in the list of acronyms by default. -To change this, you need to redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="6996"></A> as +To change this, you need to redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="7004"></A> as appropriate. For example, to display the long form followed by the short form in parentheses do: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\acrnameformat}[2]{#2 (\acronymfont{#1})} </PRE> -Note that even if you redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="6999"></A>, the +Note that even if you redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="7007"></A>, the entries will be sorted according to the short form, unless you -override this using the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="7002"></A> key in the optional -argument to <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7005"></A>. +override this using the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="7010"></A> key in the optional +argument to <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7013"></A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7013"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7021"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7016"></A> as: +This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7024"></A> as: <BR> <BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> @@ -4225,19 +4236,19 @@ Acronyms will be sorted according to the short form. <P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="7024"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="7032"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> -Note that on first use<A NAME="7025"></A>, it is the long form in the footnote that +Note that on first use<A NAME="7033"></A>, it is the long form in the footnote that links to the relevant glossary entry (where hyperlinks are enabled), whereas on subsequent use, the acronym links to the relevant glossary entry. It is possible to change this to make the acronym -on first use<A NAME="7026"></A> have the hyperlink instead of the footnote, but +on first use<A NAME="7034"></A> have the hyperlink instead of the footnote, but since the footnote marker will also be a hyperlink, you will have two hyperlinks in immediate succession. This can be ambiguous where the hyperlinks are coloured rather than boxed. -The code required to change the first use<A NAME="7027"></A> to make the +The code required to change the first use<A NAME="7035"></A> to make the acronym a hyperlink is as follows: <PRE> \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% @@ -4255,10 +4266,10 @@ for further details.) <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7034"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7042"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7043"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7052"></A> options -have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7055"></A> as: +If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7051"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7060"></A> options +have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7063"></A> as: <BR> <BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> @@ -4271,22 +4282,22 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to <code>\textsc{#1}</code>. <P> -Note that since the acronym is displayed using <TT>\textsc</TT><A NAME="7057"></A>, +Note that since the acronym is displayed using <TT>\textsc</TT><A NAME="7065"></A>, the short form, <I>abbrv</I>, should be specified in lower case. <P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="7066"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="7074"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7073"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7081"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7082"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7091"></A> options -have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7094"></A> as: +If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7090"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7099"></A> options +have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7102"></A> as: <BR> <BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> @@ -4298,26 +4309,26 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <BR> where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to <code>\textsmaller{#1}</code>.<A NAME="tex2html32" - HREF="#foot3840"><SUP>11</SUP></A>The entries will be sorted according to the short form. + HREF="#foot3848"><SUP>11</SUP></A>The entries will be sorted according to the short form. <P> -Remember to load a package that defines <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7105"></A> (such as -<TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="7108"></A>) if you want to use this option, unless you want -to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7111"></A> to use some other formatting command. +Remember to load a package that defines <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7113"></A> (such as +<TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="7116"></A>) if you want to use this option, unless you want +to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7119"></A> to use some other formatting command. <P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="7120"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="7128"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>None of the above</STRONG></DT> <DD> -If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7127"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7136"></A>, -<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7145"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7154"></A> or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7163"></A> are used, -then on first use<A NAME="7166"></A> the entry is displayed as: +If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7135"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7144"></A>, +<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7153"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7162"></A> or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7171"></A> are used, +then on first use<A NAME="7174"></A> the entry is displayed as: <BR> <BR><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)<I>insert</I> <BR> @@ -4329,14 +4340,14 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <BR> Entries will be sorted according to the short form. Note that if none of the acronym-related package options are used, -the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="7173"></A> option will not be affected. +the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="7181"></A> option will not be affected. </DD> </DL> <P> Recall from <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">earlier</A> that you can access the values of individual keys using commands -like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7177"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to +like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7185"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on @@ -4356,8 +4367,8 @@ as follows: <BR> Print the abbreviated version with (if required) a hyperlink to the relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to -<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7181"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally -put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7184"></A>. +<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7189"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally +put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7192"></A>. <BR> <BR> <P> @@ -4371,7 +4382,7 @@ put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7184" <BR> Print the long version with (if required) a hyperlink to the relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to -<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="7187"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="7190"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="7193"></A> (or their uppercase +<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="7195"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="7198"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="7201"></A> (or their uppercase variants), depending on package options. <BR> <BR> @@ -4391,7 +4402,7 @@ relevant entry in the glossary. <P> Note that if any of the above commands produce unexpected output and you haven't used any of the acronym-related package options, -you will need to switch off the sanitization<A NAME="7200"></A>. +you will need to switch off the sanitization<A NAME="7208"></A>. For example: <PRE> \usepackage[sanitize=none]{glossaries} @@ -4400,16 +4411,16 @@ However, if you do this, you must remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms or glossary entries. <P> -Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7203"></A>, you +Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7211"></A>, you may additionally need to change the above commands as well as -changing the way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="7206"></A> -and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="7209"></A>. +changing the way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="7214"></A> +and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="7217"></A>. <P> -The package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7217"></A> provides the synonyms listed +The package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7225"></A> provides the synonyms listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">5</A>. If any of those commands generate an "undefined control sequence" error message, check that you -have enabled the shortcuts using the <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7229"></A> package +have enabled the shortcuts using the <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7237"></A> package option. Note that there are no shortcuts for the commands that produce all upper case text. @@ -4419,60 +4430,60 @@ produce all upper case text. <A NAME="tab:shortcuts"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="3844"></A> +<A NAME="3852"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 5:</STRONG> -Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7238"></A></CAPTION> +Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7246"></A></CAPTION> <TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Shortcut Command </B></TH> <TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Equivalent Command</B></TH> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acs</TT><A NAME="7242"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshort</TT><A NAME="7245"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acs</TT><A NAME="7250"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshort</TT><A NAME="7253"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acs</TT><A NAME="7248"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshort</TT><A NAME="7251"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acs</TT><A NAME="7256"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshort</TT><A NAME="7259"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acsp</TT><A NAME="7254"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="7257"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acsp</TT><A NAME="7262"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="7265"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acsp</TT><A NAME="7260"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="7263"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acsp</TT><A NAME="7268"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="7271"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acl</TT><A NAME="7266"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="7269"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acl</TT><A NAME="7274"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="7277"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acl</TT><A NAME="7272"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlong</TT><A NAME="7275"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acl</TT><A NAME="7280"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlong</TT><A NAME="7283"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\aclp</TT><A NAME="7278"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="7281"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\aclp</TT><A NAME="7286"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="7289"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Aclp</TT><A NAME="7284"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="7287"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Aclp</TT><A NAME="7292"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="7295"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acf</TT><A NAME="7290"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfull</TT><A NAME="7293"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acf</TT><A NAME="7298"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfull</TT><A NAME="7301"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acf</TT><A NAME="7296"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfull</TT><A NAME="7299"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acf</TT><A NAME="7304"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfull</TT><A NAME="7307"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acfp</TT><A NAME="7302"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="7305"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acfp</TT><A NAME="7310"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="7313"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acfp</TT><A NAME="7308"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="7311"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acfp</TT><A NAME="7316"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="7319"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\ac</TT><A NAME="7314"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7317"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\ac</TT><A NAME="7322"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7325"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Ac</TT><A NAME="7320"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7323"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Ac</TT><A NAME="7328"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7331"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acp</TT><A NAME="7326"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="7329"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acp</TT><A NAME="7334"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="7337"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acp</TT><A NAME="7332"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="7335"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acp</TT><A NAME="7340"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="7343"></A></TD> </TR> </TABLE> </DIV> @@ -4491,55 +4502,55 @@ Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7238"></A></C <BR> Upgrading From the glossary Package </H3> -Users of the obsolete <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7341"></A> package may recall that +Users of the obsolete <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7349"></A> package may recall that the syntax used to define new acronyms has changed with the replacement <TT>glossaries</TT> package. In addition, the old -<TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7345"></A> package created the command +<TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7353"></A> package created the command <TT>\</TT><I>acr-name</I> when defining the acronym <I>acr-name</I>. <P> In order to facilitate migrating from the old package to the new -one, the <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="7348"></A> package<A NAME="tex2html34" - HREF="#foot2858"><SUP>12</SUP></A> +one, the <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="7356"></A> package<A NAME="tex2html34" + HREF="#foot2866"><SUP>12</SUP></A> provides the command: <BR> <BR><TT>\oldacronym[</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -This uses the same syntax as the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7351"></A> package's +This uses the same syntax as the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="7359"></A> package's method of defining acronyms. It is equivalent to: <BR> -<BR><TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7354"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR><TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7362"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -In addition, <TT>\oldacronym</TT><A NAME="7357"></A> also defines the commands -<TT>\</TT><I>label</I>, which is equivalent to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7360"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>, +In addition, <TT>\oldacronym</TT><A NAME="7365"></A> also defines the commands +<TT>\</TT><I>label</I>, which is equivalent to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7368"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>, and <TT>\</TT><I>label</I><TT>*</TT>, which is equivalent to -<TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7363"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>. If <I>label</I> is omitted, <I>abbrv</I> +<TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7371"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>. If <I>label</I> is omitted, <I>abbrv</I> is used. Since commands names must consist only of alphabetical characters, <I>label</I> must also only consist of alphabetical characters. Note that <TT>\</TT><I>label</I> doesn't allow you to use -the first optional argument of <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7366"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7369"></A> -- you will -need to explicitly use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7372"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7375"></A> to change the +the first optional argument of <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7374"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7377"></A> -- you will +need to explicitly use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7380"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="7383"></A> to change the settings. <P> Recall that, in general, LaTeX ignores spaces following command names consisting of alphabetical characters. This is also true for <TT>\</TT><I>label</I> unless you additionally load the -<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7378"></A> package. +<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7386"></A> package. <P> -The <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="7381"></A> package doesn't load the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7384"></A> package +The <TT>glossaries</TT><A NAME="7389"></A> package doesn't load the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7392"></A> package since there are both advantages and disadvantages to using -<TT>\xspace</TT><A NAME="7387"></A> in <TT>\</TT><I>label</I>. If you don't use the -<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7390"></A> package you need to explicitly force a space using -<code>SPMquot</code> " (backslash space) however you can follow <TT>\</TT><I>label</I> +<TT>\xspace</TT><A NAME="7395"></A> in <TT>\</TT><I>label</I>. If you don't use the +<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7398"></A> package you need to explicitly force a space using +<code>\ </code> (backslash space) however you can follow <TT>\</TT><I>label</I> with additional text in square brackets (the final optional -argument to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7393"></A>). If you use the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7396"></A> package +argument to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7401"></A>). If you use the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7404"></A> package you don't need to escape the spaces but you can't use the optional argument to insert text (you will have to explicitly -use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7399"></A>). +use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7407"></A>). <P> To illustrate this, suppose I define the acronym "abc" as @@ -4550,8 +4561,8 @@ follows: This will create the command <TT>\abc</TT> and its starred version <TT>\abc*</TT>. <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:xspace">Table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:xspace">6</A> illustrates the effect of <TT>\abc</TT> (on subsequent use) according to whether or not the -<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7405"></A> package has been loaded. As can be seen from the -final row in the table, the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7408"></A> package prevents the +<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7413"></A> package has been loaded. As can be seen from the +final row in the table, the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="7416"></A> package prevents the optional argument from being recognised. <P> @@ -4559,7 +4570,7 @@ optional argument from being recognised. <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> <A NAME="tab:xspace"></A> -<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="3845"></A> +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="3853"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 6:</STRONG> The effect of using @@ -4609,11 +4620,11 @@ Unsetting and Resetting Entry Flags </H2> <P> -When using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7417"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="7420"></A> and their uppercase variants it is +When using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="7425"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="7428"></A> and their uppercase variants it is possible that you may want to use the value given by the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="7423"></A> key, even though you have already used the glossary -entry<A NAME="7425"></A>. Conversely, you may want to use the value given by the -<TT>text</TT><A NAME="7427"></A> key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry. +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="7431"></A> key, even though you have already used the glossary +entry<A NAME="7433"></A>. Conversely, you may want to use the value given by the +<TT>text</TT><A NAME="7435"></A> key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry. The former can be achieved by one of the following commands: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -4679,18 +4690,18 @@ a summary of the available styles. <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> <A NAME="tab:styles"></A> -<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="3846"></A> +<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="3854"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 7:</STRONG> Glossary Styles. An asterisk in the style name indicates anything that matches that doesn't match any previously listed style (e.g. <TT>long3col*</TT> -matches <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7437"></A>, <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7439"></A>, -<TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="7441"></A> and <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7443"></A>). +matches <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7445"></A>, <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7447"></A>, +<TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="7449"></A> and <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7451"></A>). A maximum level of 0 indicates a flat glossary (sub-entries are displayed in the same way as main entries). Where the maximum level is given as -- there is no limit, but note that -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="7445"></A> imposes a limit of 2 sub-levels. If the +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="7453"></A> imposes a limit of 2 sub-levels. If the homograph column is checked, then the name is not displayed for sub-entries. If the symbol column is checked, then the symbol will be displayed if it has been defined.</CAPTION> @@ -4787,13 +4798,13 @@ be displayed if it has been defined.</CAPTION> <BR> <P> -The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7448"></A> key in the optional -argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="7451"></A> or using the command: +The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7456"></A> key in the optional +argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="7459"></A> or using the command: <BR> <BR><TT>\glossarystyle{</TT><EM>style-name</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -Some of the glossary styles may also be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7459"></A> +Some of the glossary styles may also be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7467"></A> package option, it depends if the package in which they are defined is automatically loaded by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. @@ -4803,38 +4814,38 @@ lists use the length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT> to set the width of the description column and the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT> to set the width of the page list column.<A NAME="tex2html37" - HREF="#foot3847"><SUP>13</SUP></A>These will need to be changed using <TT>\setlength</TT> if the glossary -is too wide. Note that the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7491"></A> and -<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7493"></A> styles (and their header and border variations) + HREF="#foot3855"><SUP>13</SUP></A>These will need to be changed using <TT>\setlength</TT> if the glossary +is too wide. Note that the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7499"></A> and +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7501"></A> styles (and their header and border variations) don't use these lengths as they are designed for single line -entries. Instead you should use the analogous <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7495"></A> -and <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7497"></A> styles. If you want to +entries. Instead you should use the analogous <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7503"></A> +and <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7505"></A> styles. If you want to explicitly create a line-break within a multi-line description in -a tabular-like style you should use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="7499"></A> instead of +a tabular-like style you should use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="7507"></A> instead of <code>\\</code>. <P> -Note that if you use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7502"></A> key in the -optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="7505"></A>, it will override any +Note that if you use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7510"></A> key in the +optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="7513"></A>, it will override any previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example, you do <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} \printglossary[style=long] </PRE> -then the new definition of <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="7508"></A> will not have an affect +then the new definition of <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="7516"></A> will not have an affect for this glossary, as <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> is redefined by -<code>style=long</code>. Likewise, <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7511"></A> will also +<code>style=long</code>. Likewise, <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7519"></A> will also override any previous style definitions, so, again <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} \glossarystyle{long} </PRE> will reset <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> back to its default definition for the -named glossary style (<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7514"></A> in this case). If you want to -modify the styles, either use <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7516"></A> (described +named glossary style (<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7522"></A> in this case). If you want to +modify the styles, either use <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7524"></A> (described in the next section) or make the modifications after -<TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7519"></A>, e.g.: +<TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="7527"></A>, e.g.: <PRE> \glossarystyle{long} \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} @@ -4842,13 +4853,13 @@ in the next section) or make the modifications after <P> All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the -<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7522"></A> style use the command +<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7530"></A> style use the command <TT>\glspostdescription</TT> after the description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate this full stop (or replace it with something else, say, a comma) you will need to redefine <TT>\glspostdescription</TT> before the glossary is displayed. Alternatively, you can suppress it for a given entry -by placing <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="7524"></A> in the entry's description. +by placing <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="7532"></A> in the entry's description. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -4863,19 +4874,19 @@ List Styles <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="7530"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>description</TT> +<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="7538"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>description</TT> environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that environment. These styles all ignore the entry's symbol. Note that these styles will automatically be available unless you use the -<TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="7539"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7548"></A> package options. +<TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="7547"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7556"></A> package options. <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>list</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7552"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> +<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7560"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument of the <TT>\item</TT> command (so it will appear in bold by default). The -description follows, and then the associated number list<A NAME="7554"></A> for +description follows, and then the associated number list<A NAME="7562"></A> for that entry. The symbol is ignored. If the entry has child entries, the description and number list follows (but not the name) for each child entry. Groups are separated using <TT>\indexspace</TT>. @@ -4883,14 +4894,14 @@ child entry. Groups are separated using <TT>\indexspace</TT>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="7556"></A> style is like -<TT>list</TT><A NAME="7558"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. +<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="7564"></A> style is like +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="7566"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="7560"></A> style is like -<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="7562"></A> but has a navigation line at the start of +<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="7568"></A> style is like +<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="7570"></A> but has a navigation line at the start of the glossary with links to each group that is present in the glossary. This requires an additional run through LaTeX to ensure the group information is up to date. In the navigation line, each @@ -4906,41 +4917,41 @@ to simply have a space separating each group, do: Note that the hyper-navigation line is now (as from version 1.14) set inside the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT> instead of after it to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can be changed -by redefining <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="7564"></A>, but note that this needs to +by redefining <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="7572"></A>, but note that this needs to be done <I>after</I> the glossary style has been set. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="7567"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7569"></A> +<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="7575"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7577"></A> but the description starts on the line following the name. (As -with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7571"></A> style, the symbol is ignored.) Each child -entry starts a new line, but as with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7573"></A> style, +with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7579"></A> style, the symbol is ignored.) Each child +entry starts a new line, but as with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="7581"></A> style, the name associated with each child entry is ignored. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="7575"></A> style is like -<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="7577"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. +<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="7583"></A> style is like +<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="7585"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="7579"></A> style is like -<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="7581"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="7587"></A> style is like +<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="7589"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for -<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="7583"></A>, described above. +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="7591"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG></DT> <DD>This style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment.<A NAME="tex2html38" - HREF="#foot3064"><SUP>14</SUP></A> Each + HREF="#foot3072"><SUP>14</SUP></A> Each entry starts with <code>\item[]</code>, followed by the name followed by a dotted line, followed by the description. Note that this style -ignores both the number list<A NAME="7585"></A> and the symbol. The length +ignores both the number list<A NAME="7593"></A> and the symbol. The length <TT>\glslistdottedwidth</TT> governs where the description should start. This is a flat style, so child entries are formatted in the same way as the parent entries. @@ -4948,10 +4959,10 @@ entries are formatted in the same way as the parent entries. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>sublistdotted</STRONG></DT> -<DD>This is a variation on the <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7587"></A> +<DD>This is a variation on the <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7595"></A> style designed for hierarchical glossaries. The main entries have just the name displayed. The sub entries are displayed in -the same manner as <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7589"></A>. +the same manner as <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="7597"></A>. </DD> </DL> @@ -4968,10 +4979,10 @@ Longtable Styles <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="7594"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>longtable</TT> +<TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="7602"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>longtable</TT> environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that environment. Note that these styles will automatically be available -unless you use the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="7603"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7612"></A> package +unless you use the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="7611"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7620"></A> package options. These styles fully justify the description and page list columns. If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the analogous styles described in @@ -4981,129 +4992,129 @@ analogous styles described in <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>long</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="7616"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT> -environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="7619"></A> package). It has two +<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="7624"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="7627"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second -column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="7621"></A>. +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="7629"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7623"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7631"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the parent entries except that their name is suppressed. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="7626"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7628"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="7634"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7636"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="7630"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7632"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="7638"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7640"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7634"></A> style is -like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="7636"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7642"></A> style is +like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="7644"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7638"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7640"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7646"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="7648"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the description -and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="7641"></A>. +and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="7649"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column, the width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7643"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by the -length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7646"></A>. +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7651"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by the +length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7654"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="7649"></A> style is like -the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7651"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="7657"></A> style is like +the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7659"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7653"></A> style is like -<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7655"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7661"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7663"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7657"></A> style is -like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7659"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7665"></A> style is +like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="7667"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7661"></A> style is like -<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7663"></A> but has an additional column in which the +<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7669"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="7671"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. This style is used for brief single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the -widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7665"></A> for +widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7673"></A> for multi-line descriptions. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="7667"></A> style is like -the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7669"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="7675"></A> style is like +the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7677"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7671"></A> style is like -<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7673"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7679"></A> style is like +<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7681"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7675"></A> style is -like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7677"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7683"></A> style is +like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7685"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlong4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7679"></A> style is like -<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7681"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page +<DD>The <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="7687"></A> style is like +<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="7689"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. The width of the description column is governed by the -length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7683"></A> and the width of the page list column is -governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7686"></A>. The widths of the +length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7691"></A> and the width of the page list column is +governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7694"></A>. The widths of the name and symbol columns are governed by the widest entry in the given column. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlong4colborder</TT><A NAME="7689"></A> style is like -the <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="7691"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and +<DD>The <TT>altlong4colborder</TT><A NAME="7697"></A> style is like +the <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="7699"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheader</TT><A NAME="7693"></A> style is like -<TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7695"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and +<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheader</TT><A NAME="7701"></A> style is like +<TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="7703"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7697"></A> -style is like <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7699"></A> but allows multi-line +<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7705"></A> +style is like <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7707"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. </DD> </DL> @@ -5121,119 +5132,119 @@ Longtable Styles (Ragged Right) <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7704"></A>. These styles are analogous to those -defined in <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="7707"></A> but the multiline columns are left +<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7712"></A>. These styles are analogous to those +defined in <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="7715"></A> but the multiline columns are left justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the <TT>longtable</TT> environment, they are governed by the same -parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7711"></A> -package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="7714"></A> package. Note that +parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7719"></A> +package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="7722"></A> package. Note that these styles will only be available if you explicitly load -<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7717"></A>: +<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="7725"></A>: <PRE> \usepackage{glossaries} \usepackage{glossary-longragged} </PRE> -Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7725"></A> +Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7733"></A> package option since the styles aren't defined until after the <TT>glossaries</TT> package has been loaded. <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>longragged</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7730"></A> style has two +<DD>The <TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7738"></A> style has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second column contains the (left-justified) description followed by the -number list<A NAME="7731"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. +number list<A NAME="7739"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7733"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7741"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the parent entries except that their name is suppressed. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longraggedborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longraggedborder</TT><A NAME="7736"></A> style is like -<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7738"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +<DD>The <TT>longraggedborder</TT><A NAME="7744"></A> style is like +<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7746"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longraggedheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7740"></A> style is like -<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7742"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7748"></A> style is like +<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7750"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longraggedheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7744"></A> -style is like <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7746"></A> but has horizontal and +<DD>The <TT>longraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7752"></A> +style is like <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7754"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longragged3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7748"></A> style is like -<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7750"></A> but has three columns. The first column +<DD>The <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7756"></A> style is like +<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="7758"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left justified) description and the third column contains the (left -justified) number list<A NAME="7751"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The +justified) number list<A NAME="7759"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column, the width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7753"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by -the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7756"></A>. +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7761"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by +the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7764"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="7759"></A> -style is like the <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7761"></A> style but has horizontal +<DD>The <TT>longragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="7767"></A> +style is like the <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7769"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7763"></A> style is like -<TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7765"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7771"></A> style is like +<TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7773"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7767"></A> style is -like <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7769"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7775"></A> style is +like <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7777"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7771"></A> style is -like <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7773"></A> but has an additional column in which +<DD>The <TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7779"></A> style is +like <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="7781"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. The width of the description -column is governed by the length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7775"></A> and the width of +column is governed by the length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7783"></A> and the width of the page list column is governed by the length -<TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7778"></A>. The widths of the name and symbol columns +<TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7786"></A>. The widths of the name and symbol columns are governed by the widest entry in the given column. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altlongragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="7781"></A> style is like the -<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7783"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<TT>altlongragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="7789"></A> style is like the +<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7791"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheader</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7785"></A> style is like -<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7787"></A> but has a header row. +<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7793"></A> style is like +<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="7795"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altlongragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7789"></A> style is like -<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7791"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<TT>altlongragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7797"></A> style is like +<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7799"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> @@ -5253,14 +5264,14 @@ Supertabular Styles <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="7796"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>supertabular</TT> +<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="7804"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>supertabular</TT> environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that environment. Note that these styles will automatically be available -unless you use the <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="7805"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7814"></A> package +unless you use the <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="7813"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7822"></A> package options. In general, the <TT>longtable</TT> environment is better, but there are some circumstances where it is better to use <TT>supertabular</TT>.<A NAME="tex2html39" - HREF="#foot3850"><SUP>15</SUP></A> These styles fully justify the description and page list + HREF="#foot3858"><SUP>15</SUP></A> These styles fully justify the description and page list columns. If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the analogous styles described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:superraggedstyles">Supertabular @@ -5269,130 +5280,130 @@ Styles (Ragged Right)</A>. <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>super</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="7823"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> -environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="7826"></A> package). It has two +<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="7831"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="7834"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second -column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="7828"></A>. +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="7836"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7830"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7838"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the parent entries except that their name is suppressed. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="7833"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7835"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="7841"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7843"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="7837"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7839"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="7845"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7847"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7841"></A> style is -like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="7843"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7849"></A> style is +like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="7851"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7845"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7847"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7853"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="7855"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the description -and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="7848"></A>. The +and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="7856"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7850"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the -length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7853"></A>. +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7858"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the +length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7861"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="7856"></A> style is like -the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7858"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="7864"></A> style is like +the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7866"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="7860"></A> style is like -<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7862"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="7868"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7870"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7864"></A> style -is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="7866"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7872"></A> style +is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="7874"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7868"></A> style is like -<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7870"></A> but has an additional column in which the +<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7876"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="7878"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. This style is designed for entries with brief single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the -widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7872"></A> +widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7880"></A> for multi-line descriptions. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="7874"></A> style is like -the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7876"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="7882"></A> style is like +the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7884"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7878"></A> style is like -<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7880"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7886"></A> style is like +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7888"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7882"></A> style -is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7884"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7890"></A> style +is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7892"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7886"></A> style is like -<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7888"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page +<DD>The <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="7894"></A> style is like +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="7896"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. The width of the description column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7890"></A> and the width of the page list column is -governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7893"></A>. The width of the name +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7898"></A> and the width of the page list column is +governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7901"></A>. The width of the name and symbol columns is governed by the widest entry in the given column. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colborder</TT><A NAME="7896"></A> style is like -the <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="7898"></A> style but allows multi-line descriptions +<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colborder</TT><A NAME="7904"></A> style is like +the <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="7906"></A> style but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheader</TT><A NAME="7900"></A> style is like -<TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7902"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and +<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheader</TT><A NAME="7908"></A> style is like +<TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="7910"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7904"></A> -style is like <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7906"></A> but allows multi-line +<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7912"></A> +style is like <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7914"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page lists. </DD> </DL> @@ -5410,96 +5421,96 @@ Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right) <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7911"></A>. These styles are analogous to those -defined in <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="7914"></A> but the multiline columns are left +<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7919"></A>. These styles are analogous to those +defined in <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="7922"></A> but the multiline columns are left justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the <TT>supertabular</TT> environment, they are governed by the same -parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7918"></A> -package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="7921"></A> package. Note that +parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7926"></A> +package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="7929"></A> package. Note that these styles will only be available if you explicitly load -<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7924"></A>: +<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="7932"></A>: <PRE> \usepackage{glossaries} \usepackage{glossary-superragged} </PRE> -Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7932"></A> +Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="7940"></A> package option since the styles aren't defined until after the <TT>glossaries</TT> package has been loaded. <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>superragged</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7937"></A> style uses the +<DD>The <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7945"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> environment (defined by the -<TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="7940"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column +<TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="7948"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second column contains the (left -justified) description followed by the number list<A NAME="7942"></A>. The +justified) description followed by the number list<A NAME="7950"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the -length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7944"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to +length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7952"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the parent entries except that their name is suppressed. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superraggedborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superraggedborder</TT><A NAME="7947"></A> style is -like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7949"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>superraggedborder</TT><A NAME="7955"></A> style is +like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7957"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superraggedheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7951"></A> style is -like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7953"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7959"></A> style is +like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7961"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superraggedheaderborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>superraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7955"></A> style is like -<TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7957"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<TT>superraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7963"></A> style is like +<TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="7965"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superragged3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7959"></A> style is like -<TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7961"></A> but has three columns. The first column +<DD>The <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7967"></A> style is like +<TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="7969"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left justified) description and the third column contains the (left -justified) number list<A NAME="7962"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The +justified) number list<A NAME="7970"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the length -<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7964"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the -length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7967"></A>. +<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="7972"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the +length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="7975"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="7970"></A> -style is like the <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7972"></A> style but has +<DD>The <TT>superragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="7978"></A> +style is like the <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7980"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7974"></A> -style is like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7976"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7982"></A> +style is like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7984"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>superragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7978"></A> style is like -<TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7980"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<TT>superragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7986"></A> style is like +<TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="7988"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="7982"></A> style is -like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7984"></A> but has an additional column in +<DD>The <TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="7990"></A> style is +like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="7992"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. The column widths for the name and symbol column are governed by the widest entry in the given column. @@ -5508,23 +5519,23 @@ given column. </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altsuperragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="7986"></A> style is like the -<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="7988"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<TT>altsuperragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="7994"></A> style is like the +<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="7996"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheader</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7990"></A> style is like -<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="7992"></A> but has a header row. +<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7998"></A> style is like +<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="8000"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> <DD>The -<TT>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="7994"></A> style is like -<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="7996"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<TT>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8002"></A> style is like +<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="8004"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> @@ -5544,93 +5555,93 @@ Tree-Like Styles <P> The styles described in this section are all defined in the package -<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="8001"></A>. These styles are designed for hierarchical +<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="8009"></A>. These styles are designed for hierarchical glossaries but can also be used with glossaries that don't have sub-entries. These styles will display the entry's symbol if it exists. Note that these styles will automatically be available -unless you use the <TT>notree</TT><A NAME="8009"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8018"></A> package +unless you use the <TT>notree</TT><A NAME="8017"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8026"></A> package options. <P> <DL> <DT><STRONG>index</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8022"></A> style is similar to the way +<DD>The <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8030"></A> style is similar to the way indices are usually formatted in that it has a hierarchical structure up to three levels (the main level plus two sub-levels). The name is typeset in bold, and if the symbol is present it is set in parentheses after the name and before the description. Sub-entries are indented and also include the name, the symbol in brackets (if present) and the description. Groups are separated -using <TT>\indexspace</TT><A NAME="8024"></A>. +using <TT>\indexspace</TT><A NAME="8032"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>indexgroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8027"></A> style is similar to -the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8029"></A> style except that each group has a heading. +<DD>The <TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8035"></A> style is similar to +the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8037"></A> style except that each group has a heading. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>indexhypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>indexhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8031"></A> style is like -<TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8033"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +<DD>The <TT>indexhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8039"></A> style is like +<TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8041"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for -<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8035"></A>, described above. +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8043"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>tree</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8037"></A> style is similar to the -<TT>index</TT><A NAME="8039"></A> style except that it can have arbitrary levels. -(Note that <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8041"></A> is limited to three levels, so -you will need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8044"></A> if you want more than +<DD>The <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8045"></A> style is similar to the +<TT>index</TT><A NAME="8047"></A> style except that it can have arbitrary levels. +(Note that <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8049"></A> is limited to three levels, so +you will need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8052"></A> if you want more than three levels.) Each sub-level is indented by <TT>\glstreeindent</TT>. Note that the name, symbol (if present) and description are placed in the same paragraph block. If you want the name to be apart from the -description, use the <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8047"></A> style instead. (See below.) +description, use the <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8055"></A> style instead. (See below.) <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>treegroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8049"></A> style is similar to -the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8051"></A> style except that each group has a heading. +<DD>The <TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8057"></A> style is similar to +the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8059"></A> style except that each group has a heading. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>treehypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>treehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8053"></A> style is like -<TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8055"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +<DD>The <TT>treehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8061"></A> style is like +<TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8063"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for -<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8057"></A>, described above. +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8065"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>treenoname</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8059"></A> style is like -the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8061"></A> style except that the name for each sub-entry +<DD>The <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8067"></A> style is like +the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8069"></A> style except that the name for each sub-entry is ignored. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>treenonamegroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8063"></A> style is -similar to the <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8065"></A> style except that each group +<DD>The <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8071"></A> style is +similar to the <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8073"></A> style except that each group has a heading. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>treenonamehypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>treenonamehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8067"></A> -style is like <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8069"></A> but has a set of links to +<DD>The <TT>treenonamehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8075"></A> +style is like <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8077"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for -<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8071"></A>, described above. +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8079"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>alttree</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8073"></A> style is similar to the -<TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8075"></A> style except that the indentation for each level +<DD>The <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8081"></A> style is similar to the +<TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8083"></A> style except that the indentation for each level is determined by the width of the text specified by <BR> <BR><TT>\glssetwidest[</TT><EM>level</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -5651,16 +5662,16 @@ description. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>alttreegroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8077"></A> is like the -<TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8079"></A> style except that each group has a heading. +<DD>The <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8085"></A> is like the +<TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8087"></A> style except that each group has a heading. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>alttreehypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>alttreehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8081"></A> style is -like <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8083"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +<DD>The <TT>alttreehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8089"></A> style is +like <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8091"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for -<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8085"></A>, described above. +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8093"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> @@ -5700,7 +5711,7 @@ This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading, the glossary preamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>) or the glossary postamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT>). For example, -the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8091"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment, +the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8099"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment, so the <TT>theglossary</TT> environment is simply redefined to begin and end the <TT>description</TT> environment. @@ -5713,8 +5724,8 @@ and end the <TT>description</TT> environment. This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>, which should not be affected by changes in -the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8096"></A> glossary style redefines -<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="8098"></A> +the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8104"></A> glossary style redefines +<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="8106"></A> glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row. <P> @@ -5725,12 +5736,12 @@ glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row. <P> This macro indicates what to do at the start of each logical block within the main body -of the glossary. If you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8100"></A> the glossary is +of the glossary. If you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8108"></A> the glossary is sub-divided into a maximum of twenty-eight logical blocks that are -determined by the first character of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8103"></A> key (or -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="8106"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8109"></A> key is omitted). The +determined by the first character of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8111"></A> key (or +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="8114"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8117"></A> key is omitted). The sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, numbers, A, -..., Z. If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8112"></A>, the sub-divisions depend on +..., Z. If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8120"></A>, the sub-divisions depend on the language settings. <P> @@ -5754,12 +5765,12 @@ A navigation hypertarget can be created using <P> For further details about <TT>\glsnavhypertarget</TT>, see -the documented code of <TT>glossary-hypernav</TT><A NAME="8115"></A> +the documented code of <TT>glossary-hypernav</TT><A NAME="8123"></A> in <TT>glossaries.pdf</TT>. <P> Most of the predefined glossary styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> -to simply ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8118"></A> style +to simply ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8126"></A> style redefines <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% @@ -5775,7 +5786,7 @@ See also <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> below. (Note that command definitions withi <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> <P> This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before -the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8120"></A> glossary +the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8128"></A> glossary style simply redefines <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to be <TT>\indexspace</TT>, whereas the tabular-like styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to produce a blank row. @@ -5807,13 +5818,13 @@ is done using <P> where <I>label</I> is the entry's label. Note that you -don't need to worry about whether the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="8122"></A> package has +don't need to worry about whether the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="8130"></A> package has been loaded, as <TT>\glstarget</TT> won't create a target if <TT>\hypertarget</TT> hasn't been defined. <P> For example, the -<TT>list</TT><A NAME="8125"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows: +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="8133"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% \item[\glstarget{##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5} @@ -5832,15 +5843,15 @@ may contain <TT>\delimN</TT> (to delimit individual numbers) and/or multiple occurrences of <TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>, but note that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument -to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="8127"></A>. The user can redefine this to change +to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="8135"></A>. The user can redefine this to change the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of the glossary style. However the most common use of <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> is to provide a means of suppressing the -number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8135"></A> option +number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8143"></A> option redefines <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> to ignore its argument.) Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need to worry about whether the user has specified the -<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8144"></A> package option. +<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8152"></A> package option. <P> </DD> @@ -5854,7 +5865,7 @@ This is new to version 1.17, and is used to display sub-entries. The first argument, <I>level</I>, indicates the sub-entry level. This must be an integer from 1 (first sub-level) onwards. The remaining arguments are analogous to those for -<TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT><A NAME="8148"></A> described above. +<TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT><A NAME="8156"></A> described above. </DD> </DL> @@ -5880,12 +5891,12 @@ For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point. This means that the glossary should be placed in the <TT>itemize</TT> environment, so <TT>theglossary</TT> should start and end that environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between -the glossary groups (so <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT><A NAME="8156"></A> and <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="8159"></A> +the glossary groups (so <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT><A NAME="8164"></A> and <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="8167"></A> should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear -immediately after <code>\begin{theglossary}</code> (so <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="8162"></A> +immediately after <code>\begin{theglossary}</code> (so <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="8170"></A> should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and -last of all the number list<A NAME="8164"></A> should appear within square brackets +last of all the number list<A NAME="8172"></A> should appear within square brackets at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say, <TT>mylist</TT>, as follows: <PRE> @@ -5928,7 +5939,7 @@ If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified version of an existing style, you can use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT> within the second argument of <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> followed by whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want -a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8169"></A> style but you don't want the extra +a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8177"></A> style but you don't want the extra vertical space created by <TT>\indexspace</TT> between groups, then you can create a new glossary style called, say, <TT>mylist</TT> as follows: @@ -5949,15 +5960,15 @@ follows: Accessibility Support </H2> Limited accessibility support is provided by the accompanying -<TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="8174"></A> package, but note that this package is -experimental and it requires the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="8177"></A> package -which is also listed as experimental. The <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="8180"></A> key +<TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="8182"></A> package, but note that this package is +experimental and it requires the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="8185"></A> package +which is also listed as experimental. The <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="8188"></A> key is used to specify the replacement text. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{tex}{name={\TeX},description={Document preparation language},symbol={TeX}} </PRE> -When you reference this entry using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8183"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="8186"></A> or +When you reference this entry using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8191"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="8194"></A> or their uppercase variants, the symbol is used as the replacement text. For example, <code>\gls{tex}</code> would be equivalent to <PRE> @@ -5966,7 +5977,7 @@ text. For example, <code>\gls{tex}</code> would be equivalent to See the section "glossaries-accsupp code" in the document <TT>glossaries.pdf</TT> for further details. It is -recommended that you also read the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="8189"></A> documentation. +recommended that you also read the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="8197"></A> documentation. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -5981,7 +5992,7 @@ Mfirstuc Package <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> bundle is supplied with the package -<TT>mfirstuc</TT><A NAME="8196"></A> which provides the command: +<TT>mfirstuc</TT><A NAME="8204"></A> which provides the command: <BR> <BR> <TT>\makefirstuc{</TT><EM>stuff</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -5998,7 +6009,7 @@ object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: <P> </LI> <LI><code>\makefirstuc{\emph{abc}}</code> produces <I>Abc</I> -(<TT>\MakeUppercase</TT><A NAME="8199"></A> has been applied to the letter "a" rather +(<TT>\MakeUppercase</TT><A NAME="8207"></A> has been applied to the letter "a" rather than <TT>\emph</TT>.) Note however that <code>\makefirstuc{{\em abc}}</code> produces <I>ABC</I> and <code>{\makefirstuc{\em abc}}</code> produces abc. @@ -6024,7 +6035,7 @@ than <TT>\emph</TT>.) Note however that </UL> Note that non-Latin or accented characters appearing at the start of the text must be placed in a group (even if you are -using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="8202"></A> package) due to expansion issues. +using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="8210"></A> package) due to expansion issues. <P> In version 1.02 of <TT>mfirstuc</TT>, a bug fix resulted in a change @@ -6062,7 +6073,7 @@ produces: Abc. <P> If you want to use an alternative command to convert to uppercase, for example <TT>\MakeTextUppercase</TT>,<A NAME="tex2html40" - HREF="#foot3863"><SUP>16</SUP></A> you can redefine the internal + HREF="#foot3871"><SUP>16</SUP></A> you can redefine the internal command <TT>\@gls@makefirstuc</TT>. For example: <PRE> \renewcommand{\@gls@makefirstuc}[1]{\MakeTextUppercase #1} @@ -6085,1597 +6096,1597 @@ and <TT>\makeatother</TT>.) Index</A> </H2><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Ac</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7314">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7320">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7322">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7328">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>accsupp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8177">Accessibility Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8189">Accessibility Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8185">Accessibility Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8197">Accessibility Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acf</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7290">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7296">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7298">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7304">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acfp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7302">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7308">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7310">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7316">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7266">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7272">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7274">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7280">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Aclp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7278">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7284">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7286">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7292">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7326">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7332">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7334">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7340">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfull</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7293">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7299">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7301">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7307">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7305">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7311">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7313">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7319">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlong</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4694">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7269">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7275">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4702">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7277">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7283">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7281">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7287">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7289">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7295">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acrnameformat</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6990">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6996">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6999">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6998">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7004">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7007">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymfont</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6993">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7111">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7184">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7001">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7119">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7192">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4222">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4230">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymtype</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4819">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4816">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4840">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4925">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5544">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6472">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6475">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4827">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4824">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4848">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4933">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5552">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6480">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6483">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshort</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7245">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7251">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7253">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7259">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7257">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7263">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7265">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7271">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acs</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7242">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7248">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7250">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7256">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acsp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7254">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7260">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7262">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7268">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>array</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7714">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7921">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7722">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7929">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>babel</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4182">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4186">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4204">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4252">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4685">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4190">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4194">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4212">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4260">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4693">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\clearpage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4879">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4887">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplay</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6801">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7206">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6809">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7214">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6804">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7209">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6812">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7217">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\descriptionname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4237">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4245">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\emph</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5777">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5785">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\entryname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4234">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4242">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG>file types</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>.alg</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4366">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4374">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>.aux</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4415">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6286">Language and Encodings</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4423">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6294">Language and Encodings</A> <DT><STRONG>.glg</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4364">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4477">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4558">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4717">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4372">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4485">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4566">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4725">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG>.glo</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4481">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4562">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5316">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4489">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4570">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5324">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.gls</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4479">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4560">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5318">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4487">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4568">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5326">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.ist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4533">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4538">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4608">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5243">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5338">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5355">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4541">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4546">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4616">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5251">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5346">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5363">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.log</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4715">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4723">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG>.tex</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4456">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4531">Using makeindex explicitly</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4464">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4539">Using makeindex explicitly</A> <DT><STRONG>.xdy</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4461">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4463">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4613">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5272">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5343">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5363">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6248">Xindy</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4469">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4471">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4621">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5280">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5351">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5371">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6256">Xindy</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>first use</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4656">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4666">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5983">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6020">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6035">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6469">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6489">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6586">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6754">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6824">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6899">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6956">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7016">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7025">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7026">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7027">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7055">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7094">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7166">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7425">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4664">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4674">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5991">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6028">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6043">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6477">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6497">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6594">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6762">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6832">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6907">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6964">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7024">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7033">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7034">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7035">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7063">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7102">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7174">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7433">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> <DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>flag</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5749">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5762">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5763">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5868">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5875">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5885">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5898">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5911">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5924">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6108">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5757">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5770">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5771">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5876">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5883">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5893">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5906">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5919">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5932">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6116">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> <DT><STRONG>text</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5451">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5473">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6121">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6125">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5459">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5481">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6129">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6133">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>flowfram</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7820">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7828">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>fmtcount</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6343">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6351">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>german</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4201">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4209">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossaries</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4092">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4210">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7348">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7381">Upgrading From the glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4100">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4218">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7356">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7389">Upgrading From the glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4131">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8174">Accessibility Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4139">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8182">Accessibility Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3968">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4681">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7341">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7345">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7351">Upgrading From the glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3976">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4689">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7349">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7353">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7359">Upgrading From the glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>glossary styles</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7567">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7577">List Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG> <DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7575">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7581">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7585">List Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7583">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7589">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7579">List Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7587">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlong4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7495">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7665">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7679">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7503">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7673">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7687">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7689">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7697">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7693">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7701">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlong4colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7697">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7705">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7771">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7783">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7787">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7779">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7791">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7795">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7781">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7789">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7785">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7791">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7793">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7799">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7789">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7797">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7497">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7872">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7886">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7505">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7880">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7894">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7896">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7904">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7900">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7908">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7904">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7912">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7982">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7988">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7992">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> -<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7986">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> -<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheader</STRONG> <DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7990">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7996">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> -<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</STRONG> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8000">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colborder</STRONG> <DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7994">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7998">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8004">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8002">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>alttree</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8047">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8073">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8079">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8055">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8081">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8087">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>alttreegroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8077">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8083">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8085">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8091">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>alttreehypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8081">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8089">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>index</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6829">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6931">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8022">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8029">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8039">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6837">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6939">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8030">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8037">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8047">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>indexgroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8027">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8033">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8035">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8041">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>indexhypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8031">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8039">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>list</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5003">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7552">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7558">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7569">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7571">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7573">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8091">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8096">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8120">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8125">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8169">Example: creating a new</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5011">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7560">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7566">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7577">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7579">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7581">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8099">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8104">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8128">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8133">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8177">Example: creating a new</A> <DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7522">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7587">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7589">List Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7530">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7595">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7597">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7556">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7562">List Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7564">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7570">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7560">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7583">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8035">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8057">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8071">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8085">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8118">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7568">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7591">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8043">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8065">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8079">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8093">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8126">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>long</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7514">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7616">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7628">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7632">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7522">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7624">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7636">Longtable Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7640">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7648">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7437">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7638">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7651">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7655">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7445">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7646">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7659">Longtable Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7663">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7671">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7441">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7649">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7449">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7657">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7439">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7653">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7659">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7447">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7661">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7667">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7443">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7657">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7451">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7665">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7491">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7661">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7499">Glossary Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7669">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7673">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7677">Longtable Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7681">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7689">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7667">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7691">Longtable Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7671">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7677">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7695">Longtable Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG> <DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7675">Longtable Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7699">Longtable Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7679">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7685">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7703">Longtable Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7683">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7707">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7626">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7634">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7630">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7636">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8098">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7638">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7644">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8106">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7634">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7642">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>longragged</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7730">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7738">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7742">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7738">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7746">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7750">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7758">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longragged3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7748">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7761">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7765">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7756">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7769">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7773">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7781">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7759">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7767">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7763">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7769">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7771">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7777">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longragged3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7767">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7775">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longraggedborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7736">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7744">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longraggedheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7740">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7746">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7748">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7754">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>longraggedheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7744">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7752">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>super</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7823">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7835">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7839">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7831">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7843">Supertabular Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7847">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7855">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7845">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7858">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7862">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7853">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7866">Supertabular Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7870">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7878">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7856">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7864">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7860">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7866">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7868">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7874">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7864">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7872">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7493">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7868">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7501">Glossary Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7876">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7880">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7884">Supertabular Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7888">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7896">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7874">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7898">Supertabular Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7878">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7884">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7902">Supertabular Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG> <DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7882">Supertabular Styles</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7906">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7886">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7892">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7910">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7890">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7914">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7833">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7841">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7837">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7843">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7845">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7851">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7841">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7849">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superragged</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7937">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7949">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7953">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7945">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7957">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7961">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7969">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superragged3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7959">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7972">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7976">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7967">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7980">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7984">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7992">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7970">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7978">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7974">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7980">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7982">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7988">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superragged3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7978">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7986">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superraggedborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7947">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7955">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superraggedheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7951">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7957">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7959">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7965">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>superraggedheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7955">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7963">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>tree</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8037">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8051">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8061">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8075">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8045">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8059">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8069">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8083">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>treegroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8049">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8055">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8057">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8063">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>treehypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8053">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8061">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>treenoname</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8059">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8065">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8067">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8073">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>treenonamegroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8063">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8069">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8071">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8077">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>treenonamehypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8067">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8075">Tree-Like Styles</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-hypernav</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8115">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8123">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-list</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4999">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6214">Changing the way the</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7530">List Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5007">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6222">Changing the way the</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7538">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-long</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4965">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6217">Changing the way the</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7594">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7707">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4973">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6225">Changing the way the</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7602">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7715">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-longragged</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7704">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7711">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7717">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7712">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7719">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7725">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-super</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4982">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6220">Changing the way the</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7796">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7914">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4990">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6228">Changing the way the</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7804">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7922">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-superragged</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7911">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7918">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7924">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7919">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7926">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7932">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-tree</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5024">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6223">Changing the way the</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8001">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5032">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6231">Changing the way the</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8009">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8148">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8156">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8127">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8135">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryheader</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7564">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8162">Example: creating a completely</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7572">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8170">Example: creating a completely</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4219">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4227">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossarystyle</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5047">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6184">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7511">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5055">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6192">Displaying a glossary</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7519">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7527">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\gls</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4163">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5440">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5449">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5751">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5906">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5978">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6027">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6057">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6087">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7317">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7323">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7360">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7363">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7366">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7369">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7372">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7375">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7393">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7399">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7417">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8183">Accessibility Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4171">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5448">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5457">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5759">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5914">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5986">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6035">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6065">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6095">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7325">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7331">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7368">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7371">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7374">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7377">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7380">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7383">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7401">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7407">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7425">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8191">Accessibility Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4026">Sample Documents</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4034">Sample Documents</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>types</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6081">Adding an Entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6089">Adding an Entry to</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5792">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5800">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6368">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6376">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsclearpage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4876">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4884">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4822">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4834">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4830">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4842">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdesc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7187">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7195">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdescwidth</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7623">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7643">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7683">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7733">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7753">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7775">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7830">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7850">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7890">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7944">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7964">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7631">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7651">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7691">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7741">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7761">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7783">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7838">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7858">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7898">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7952">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7972">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5587">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5765">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6015">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6033">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5595">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5773">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6023">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6041">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplay</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5419">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5511">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5887">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5900">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5913">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5427">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5519">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5895">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5908">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5921">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5422">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5514">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5890">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5903">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5916">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5430">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5522">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5898">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5911">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5924">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsentryname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6130">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6138">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7193">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7201">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsgroupheading</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8156">Example: creating a completely</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8164">Example: creating a completely</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsgroupskip</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4016">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7508">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8159">Example: creating a completely</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4024">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7516">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8167">Example: creating a completely</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glshyperlink</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6110">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6118">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glslabel</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6009">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6017">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5584">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5877">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6012">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6054">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6075">Adding an Entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5592">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5885">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6020">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6062">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6083">Adding an Entry to</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5853">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5861">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5768">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5789">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6316">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6328">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5776">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5797">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6324">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6336">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG>hyper</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5856">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6060">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6078">Adding an Entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5864">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6068">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6086">Adding an Entry to</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4249">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4257">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7646">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7686">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7756">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7778">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7853">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7893">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7967">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7654">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7694">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7764">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7786">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7861">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7901">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7975">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glspl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5425">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5428">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5431">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5459">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5471">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5517">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5520">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5523">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5754">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5981">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6030">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7329">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7335">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7420">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8186">Accessibility Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5433">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5436">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5439">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5467">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5479">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5525">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5528">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5531">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5762">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5989">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6038">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7337">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7343">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7428">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8194">Accessibility Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5462">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5481">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5470">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5489">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glssee</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3962">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5801">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3970">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5809">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4406">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4414">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4403">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4411">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5699">Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5707">Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbol</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7190">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7198">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4246">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4254">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glstext</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5919">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5926">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5932">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5938">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5950">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5962">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7177">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7181">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5927">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5934">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5940">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5946">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5958">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5970">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7185">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7189">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glstextformat</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6023">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6031">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>html</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6050">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6058">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperbf</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5823">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5831">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperemph</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5841">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5849">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperit</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5829">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5837">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperlink</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5844">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6063">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5852">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6071">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypermd</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5826">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5834">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperpage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5804">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5812">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>hyperref</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4873">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5717">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5745">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5807">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6047">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6069">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8122">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4881">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5725">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5753">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5815">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6055">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6077">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8130">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperrm</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5814">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6322">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5822">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6330">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5838">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5846">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersf</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5817">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5825">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5832">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5840">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertarget</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6066">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6074">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertt</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5820">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5828">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperup</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5835">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5843">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\indexspace</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8024">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8032">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>inputenc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4074">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4166">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5566">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6292">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8202">Mfirstuc Package</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4082">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4174">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5574">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6300">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8210">Mfirstuc Package</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\inputencodingname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6295">Language and Encodings</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6303">Language and Encodings</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\jobname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5352">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5360">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5360">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5368">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>link text</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5735">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5747">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5748">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5858">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5976">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6021">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6042">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5743">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5755">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5756">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5866">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5984">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6029">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6050">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG>location list</STRONG> <DD><i>see </i> number list <DT><STRONG><TT>longtable</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4968">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7619">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4976">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7627">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\makefirstuc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7102">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7110">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\makeglossaries</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3972">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3981">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4001">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4013">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4032">Sample Documents</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3980">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3989">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4009">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4021">Sample Documents</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4040">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4061">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4077">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4083">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4086">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4098">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4113">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4125">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4169">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4175">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4296">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4305">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4308">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4327">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4333">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4342">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4351">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4355">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4412">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4423">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4426">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4447">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4495">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4501">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4507">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4576">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4582">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4588">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4709">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4712">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4668">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4671">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4697">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4706">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5228">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5234">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5257">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5263">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5300">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5326">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5702">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5723">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6090">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6136">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6151">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6283">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6304">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6310">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6337">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6340">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6355">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6358">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6374">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6377">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6387">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6390">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6409">Glossary Groups</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6412">Glossary Groups</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6425">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6464">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4048">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4069">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4085">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4091">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4094">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4106">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4121">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4133">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4177">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4183">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4304">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4313">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4316">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4335">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4341">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4350">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4359">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4363">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4420">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4431">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4434">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4455">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4503">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4509">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4515">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4584">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4590">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4596">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4717">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4720">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4676">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4679">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4705">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4714">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5236">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5242">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5265">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5271">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5308">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5334">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5710">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5731">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6098">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6144">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6159">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6291">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6312">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6318">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6345">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6348">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6363">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6366">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6382">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6385">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6395">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6398">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6417">Glossary Groups</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6420">Glossary Groups</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6433">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6472">Defining New Glossaries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3975">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3984">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4004">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4007">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4010">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4029">Sample Documents</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3983">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3992">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4012">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4015">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4018">Sample Documents</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4037">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4064">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4071">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4104">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4128">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4142">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4148">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4264">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4368">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4273">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4280">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4286">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4299">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4324">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4336">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4345">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4361">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4420">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4516">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4528">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4535">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4045">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4072">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4079">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4112">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4136">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4150">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4156">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4272">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4376">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4281">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4288">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4294">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4307">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4332">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4344">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4353">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4369">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4428">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4524">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4536">Using makeindex explicitly</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4543">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4555">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4579">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4585">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4600">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4605">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4618">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4677">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4725">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5225">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5231">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5237">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5269">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5329">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5335">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5349">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4551">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4563">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4587">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4593">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4608">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4613">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4626">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4685">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4733">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5233">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5239">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5245">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5277">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5337">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5343">Defining Glossary Entries</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5357">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5532">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5572">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5690">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5708">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5737">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5771">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5786">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6139">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6145">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6419">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7445">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8041">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8100">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5365">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5540">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5580">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5698">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5716">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5745">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5779">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5794">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6147">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6153">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6427">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7453">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8049">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8108">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\MakeUppercase</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8199">Mfirstuc Package</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8207">Mfirstuc Package</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>mfirstuc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8196">Mfirstuc Package</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8204">Mfirstuc Package</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newacronym</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4022">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4837">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5156">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5168">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5180">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5192">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5204">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6487">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6536">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6548">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6945">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6969">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7005">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7203">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7354">Upgrading From the glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4030">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4845">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5164">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5176">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5188">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5200">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5212">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6495">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6544">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6556">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6953">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6977">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7013">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7211">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7362">Upgrading From the glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4492">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4573">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4861">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4500">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4581">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4869">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4019">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5732">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5866">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6639">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4027">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5740">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5874">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6647">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5089">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5104">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5126">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5407">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5395">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5434">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5965">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5968">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5971">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5997">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6667">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6916">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6966">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5097">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5112">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5134">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5415">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5403">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5442">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5973">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5976">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5979">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6005">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6675">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6924">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6974">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>descriptionplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5416">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6000">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5424">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6008">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG>first</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5446">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5478">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5484">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5487">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5493">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5502">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5757">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5863">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5873">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5893">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5922">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5991">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6123">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6661">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7423">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5454">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5486">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5492">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5495">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5501">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5510">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5765">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5871">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5881">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5901">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5930">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5999">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6131">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6669">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7431">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> <DT><STRONG>firstplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5468">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5490">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5499">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5593">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5883">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5935">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5994">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6127">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5476">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5498">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5507">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5601">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5891">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5943">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6002">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6135">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> <DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5847">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5855">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>name</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5086">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5107">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5123">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5138">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5141">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5401">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5392">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5398">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5443">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5538">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5612">Homographs</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5941">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5944">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5947">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6113">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6910">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6913">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8106">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5094">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5115">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5131">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5146">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5149">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5409">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5400">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5406">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5451">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5546">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5620">Homographs</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5949">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5952">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5955">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6121">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6918">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6921">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8114">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5556">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5564">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>parent</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5413">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5404">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5603">Hierarchical Categories</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5421">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5412">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5611">Hierarchical Categories</A> <DT><STRONG>plural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5456">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5475">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5496">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5581">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5590">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5622">Homographs</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5880">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5929">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5988">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6119">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5464">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5483">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5504">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5589">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5598">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5630">Homographs</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5888">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5937">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5996">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6127">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> <DT><STRONG>see</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3965">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5560">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5563">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5798">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6093">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6096">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6099">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3973">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5568">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5571">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5806">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6101">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6104">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6107">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>sort</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4719">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5132">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5529">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5569">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5619">Homographs</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6942">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7002">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8103">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8109">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4727">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5140">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5537">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5577">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5627">Homographs</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6950">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7010">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8111">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8117">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5092">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5110">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5129">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5505">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5526">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5953">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5956">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5959">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6003">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6018">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6040">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6670">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6826">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6919">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8180">Accessibility Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5100">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5118">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5137">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5513">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5534">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5961">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5964">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5967">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6011">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6026">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6048">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6678">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6834">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6927">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8188">Accessibility Support</A> <DT><STRONG>symbolplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5508">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6006">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5516">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6014">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG>text</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5135">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5144">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5437">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5453">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5465">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5760">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5860">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5870">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5896">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5909">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5985">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6116">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6664">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7427">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5143">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5152">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5445">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5461">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5473">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5768">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5868">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5878">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5904">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5917">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5993">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6124">Using Glossary Terms Without</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6672">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7435">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A> <DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5541">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5628">Loading Entries From a</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5549">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5636">Loading Entries From a</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossarystyle</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7516">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7524">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newline</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5410">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7499">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5418">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7507">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>ngerman</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4198">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6254">Xindy</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4206">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6262">Xindy</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\nohyperpage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5720">Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5728">Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\noist</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4089">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5705">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5726">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6264">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6301">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6334">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6352">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6371">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6384">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6406">Glossary Groups</A> -<DT><STRONG><TT>\nopostdesc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5606">Hierarchical Categories</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5615">Homographs</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7524">Glossary Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG>number list</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4024">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4035">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4353">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5064">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5074">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5367">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5389">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5390">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5558">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5598">Sub-Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5617">Homographs</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5670">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5742">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6101">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4097">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5713">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5734">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6272">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6309">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6342">Locations and Number lists</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6360">Locations and Number lists</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6379">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6417">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7554">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7585">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7621">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7641">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7731">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7751">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7828">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7848">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7942">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7962">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8164">Example: creating a completely</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6392">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6414">Glossary Groups</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\nopostdesc</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5614">Hierarchical Categories</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5623">Homographs</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7532">Glossary Styles</A> +<DT><STRONG>number list</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4032">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4043">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4361">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5072">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5082">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5375">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5397">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5398">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5566">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5606">Sub-Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5625">Homographs</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5678">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5750">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6109">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6368">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6387">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6425">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7562">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7593">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7629">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7649">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7739">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7759">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7836">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7856">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7950">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7970">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8172">Example: creating a completely</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\oldacronym</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7357">Upgrading From the glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7365">Upgrading From the glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>package options</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>acronym</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4230">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4232">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4473">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4475">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4488">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4490">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4551">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4553">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4569">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4571">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4803">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4805">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4812">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4814">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4830">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4832">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4857">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4859">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4920">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4922">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4933">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4935">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4942">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4944">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5552">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5554">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5636">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5638">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5645">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5647">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5654">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5656">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5663">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5665">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6442">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6444">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6451">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6453">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6460">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6462">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6483">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6485">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4238">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4240">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4481">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4483">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4496">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4498">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4559">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4561">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4577">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4579">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4811">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4813">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4820">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4822">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4838">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4840">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4865">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4867">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4928">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4930">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4941">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4943">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4950">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4952">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5560">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5562">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5644">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5646">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5653">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5655">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5662">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5664">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5671">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5673">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6450">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6452">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6459">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6461">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6468">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6470">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6491">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6493">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5071">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5073">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5374">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5376">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5686">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5688">Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5079">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5081">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5382">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5384">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5694">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5696">Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5152">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5154">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6514">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6516">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6574">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6576">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6678">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6680">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6696">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6698">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6714">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6716">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6797">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6799">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6812">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6814">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6906">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6908">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6927">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6929">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6938">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6940">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6953">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6955">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7052">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7054">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7091">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7093">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7163">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7165">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5160">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5162">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6522">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6524">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6582">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6584">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6686">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6688">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6704">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6706">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6722">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6724">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6805">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6807">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6820">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6822">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6914">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6916">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6935">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6937">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6946">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6948">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6961">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6963">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7060">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7062">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7099">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7101">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7171">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7173">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5200">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5202">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6523">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6525">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6705">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6707">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6750">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6752">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6788">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6790">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6860">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6862">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6869">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6871">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6986">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6988">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7154">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7156">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5208">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5210">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6531">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6533">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6713">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6715">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6758">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6760">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6796">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6798">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6868">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6870">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6877">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6879">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6994">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6996">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7162">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7164">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>footnote</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5164">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5166">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6532">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6534">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6583">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6585">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6687">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6689">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6723">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6725">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6779">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6781">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6821">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6823">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6878">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6880">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6977">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6979">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7013">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7015">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7043">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7045">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7082">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7084">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7145">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7147">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5172">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5174">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6540">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6542">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6591">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6593">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6695">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6697">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6731">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6733">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6787">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6789">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6829">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6831">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6886">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6888">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6985">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6987">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7021">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7023">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7051">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7053">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7090">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7092">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7153">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7155">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>makeindex</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5221">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5223">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5229">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5231">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>nolist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4994">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4996">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7539">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7541">List Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5002">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5004">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7547">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7549">List Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>nolong</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4960">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4962">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7469">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7471">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7603">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7605">Longtable Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4968">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4970">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7477">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7479">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7611">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7613">Longtable Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>nomain</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4848">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4850">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6433">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6435">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4856">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4858">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6441">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6443">Defining New Glossaries</A> <DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5061">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5063">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5677">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5679">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8135">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8137">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8144">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8146">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5069">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5071">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5685">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5687">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8143">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8145">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8152">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8154">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>nostyles</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5033">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5035">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7487">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7489">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7548">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7550">List Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7612">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7614">Longtable Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7814">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7816">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8018">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8020">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5041">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5043">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7495">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7497">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7556">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7558">List Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7620">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7622">Longtable Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7822">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7824">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8026">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8028">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>nosuper</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4977">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4979">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7478">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7480">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7805">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7807">Supertabular Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4985">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4987">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7486">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7488">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7813">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7815">Supertabular Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>notree</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5019">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5021">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8009">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8011">Tree-Like Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5027">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5029">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8017">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8019">Tree-Like Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>nowarn</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5308">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5310">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5316">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5318">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4887">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4889">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4896">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4898">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4911">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6195">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6197">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6204">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6206">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4895">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4897">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4904">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4906">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4919">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6203">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6205">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6212">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6214">Displaying a glossary</A> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>autolabel</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4913">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4904">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4921">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4912">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>false</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4900">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4908">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>nolabel</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4902">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4910">Package Options</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>numberline</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4758">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4760">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4794">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4796">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4766">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4768">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4802">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4804">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>order</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4048">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4057">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4379">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4388">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5292">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5294">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4056">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4065">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4387">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4396">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5300">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5302">Package Options</A> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>letter</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4059">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4381">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5298">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4067">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4389">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5306">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>word</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4050">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4390">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5296">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4058">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4398">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5304">Package Options</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>sanitize</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5081">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5083">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5100">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5102">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5118">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6837">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6839">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5089">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5091">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5108">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5110">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5126">Package Options</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6845">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6852">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6963">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7023">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7065">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7119">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7173">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7175">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7200">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7201">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6847">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6853">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6860">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6971">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7031">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7073">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7127">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7181">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7183">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7208">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7209">Acronyms</A> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6846">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7024">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6854">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7032">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>none</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5120">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5128">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6853">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6964">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7066">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7120">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6861">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6972">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7074">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7128">Acronyms</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>section</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4869">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4871">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4877">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4879">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>shortcuts</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5212">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5214">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6544">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6546">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7217">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7219">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7229">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7231">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7238">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7240">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5220">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5222">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6552">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6554">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7225">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7227">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7237">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7239">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7246">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7248">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>smallcaps</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4635">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4637">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4644">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4646">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5176">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5178">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6496">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6498">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6556">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6558">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6602">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6604">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6611">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6613">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6647">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6649">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6732">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6734">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6761">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6763">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6896">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6898">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7034">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7036">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7127">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7129">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4643">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4645">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4652">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4654">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5184">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5186">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6504">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6506">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6564">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6566">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6610">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6612">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6619">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6621">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6655">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6657">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6740">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6742">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6769">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6771">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6904">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6906">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7042">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7044">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7135">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7137">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>smaller</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4653">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4655">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4661">Troubleshooting</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4663">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4665">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5188">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5190">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6505">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6507">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6565">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6567">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6593">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6595">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6620">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6622">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6632">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6634">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6656">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6658">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6741">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6743">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6770">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6772">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6887">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6889">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7073">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7075">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7136">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7138">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4671">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4673">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5196">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5198">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6513">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6515">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6573">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6575">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6601">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6603">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6628">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6630">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6640">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6642">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6664">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6666">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6749">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6751">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6778">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6780">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6895">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6897">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7081">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7083">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7144">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7146">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4951">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4953">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5010">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5012">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5043">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5045">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6180">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6182">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7459">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7461">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7725">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7727">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7932">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7934">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4959">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4961">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5018">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5020">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5051">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5053">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6188">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6190">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7467">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7469">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7733">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7735">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7940">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7942">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG>toc</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4749">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4751">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4767">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4769">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4776">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4778">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4785">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4787">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6168">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6170">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4757">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4759">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4775">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4777">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4784">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4786">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4793">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4795">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6176">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6178">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>xindy</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4121">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4123">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4159">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4161">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4317">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4319">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4397">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4399">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4440">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4442">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4524">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4526">Using makeindex explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5250">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5252">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5279">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5281">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5386">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5388">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6237">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6239">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6402">Glossary Groups</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6404">Glossary Groups</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4129">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4131">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4167">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4169">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4325">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4327">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4405">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4407">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4448">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4450">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4532">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4534">Using makeindex explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5258">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5260">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5287">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5289">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5394">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5396">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6245">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6247">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6410">Glossary Groups</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6412">Glossary Groups</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\pagelistname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4243">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4251">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossaries</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4703">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5323">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4711">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5331">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4700">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5053">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5320">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7451">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7505">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4708">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5061">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5328">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7459">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7513">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6208">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6216">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6187">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6195">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5050">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6172">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7448">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7502">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5058">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6180">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7456">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7510">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>title</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6157">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6165">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>toctitle</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6160">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6168">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6154">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6162">Displaying a glossary</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>relsize</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6624">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7108">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6632">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7116">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\seename</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6103">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6111">Cross-Referencing Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\setAlphaCompositor</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6365">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6373">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\setCompositor</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6362">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6370">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\setStyleFile</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4465">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4540">Using makeindex explicitly</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4473">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4548">Using makeindex explicitly</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\smaller</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7096">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7104">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>supertabular</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4985">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7826">Supertabular Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7940">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4993">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7834">Supertabular Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7948">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\symbolname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4240">Changing the Fixed Names</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4248">Changing the Fixed Names</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\textbf</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5774">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5782">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\textrm</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6319">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6327">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\textsc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7057">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7065">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\textsmaller</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7099">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7105">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7107">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7113">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\thepage</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6346">Locations and Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6354">Locations and Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>translator</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4189">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4192">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4195">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4207">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4213">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4255">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4258">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4689">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4197">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4200">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4203">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4215">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4221">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4263">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4266">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4697">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>xindy</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3978">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3987">Introduction</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4068">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4080">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4095">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4101">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4107">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4110">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4139">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4145">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4151">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4172">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4178">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4261">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4267">Changing the Fixed Names</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4371">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4276">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4283">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4289">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4292">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4302">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4321">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4339">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4348">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4358">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4417">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4432">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4444">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4450">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4453">Using xindy explicitly</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3986">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3995">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4076">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4088">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4103">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4109">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4115">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4118">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4147">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4153">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4159">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4180">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4186">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4269">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4275">Changing the Fixed Names</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4379">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4284">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4291">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4297">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4300">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4310">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4329">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4347">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4356">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4366">Generating the Associated Glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4425">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4440">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4452">Using xindy explicitly</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4458">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4498">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4504">Using xindy explicitly</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4597">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4610">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4615">Note to Front-End and</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4674">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4722">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4728">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4731">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4734">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4737">Troubleshooting</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5240">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5254">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5260">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5266">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5283">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5332">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4461">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4466">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4506">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4512">Using xindy explicitly</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4605">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4618">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4623">Note to Front-End and</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4682">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4730">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4736">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4739">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4742">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4745">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5248">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5262">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5268">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5274">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5291">Package Options</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5340">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5346">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5365">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5378">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5535">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5575">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5693">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5696">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5711">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5714">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5740">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5783">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5795">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5850">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6142">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6148">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6229">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6241">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6245">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6250">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6257">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6261">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6268">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6271">Xindy</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6277">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6280">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6289">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6298">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6307">Language and Encodings</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6325">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6331">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6349">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6381">Locations and Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6422">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8044">Tree-Like Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8112">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5348">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5354">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5373">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5386">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5543">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5583">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5701">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5704">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5719">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5722">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5748">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5791">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5803">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5858">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6150">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6156">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6237">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6249">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6253">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6258">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6265">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6269">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6276">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6279">Xindy</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6285">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6288">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6297">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6306">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6315">Language and Encodings</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6333">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6339">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6357">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6389">Locations and Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6430">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8052">Tree-Like Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8120">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>xkeyval</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3997">Sample Documents</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4627">Troubleshooting</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4005">Sample Documents</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4635">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>xspace</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7378">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7384">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7387">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7390">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7396">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7405">Upgrading From the glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7408">Upgrading From the glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7386">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7392">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7395">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7398">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7404">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7413">Upgrading From the glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7416">Upgrading From the glossary</A> </DL> <P> @@ -7684,37 +7695,37 @@ Index</A> <P> <BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4> <DL> -<DT><A NAME="foot3891">... used</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3899">... used</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html2"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> <DD>that is, if the term has been referenced using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A>, <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an Entry to the Glossary Without Generating Text</A> or -via <TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="3962"></A> (or the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="3965"></A> key) +via <TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="3970"></A> (or the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="3973"></A> key) </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3686">... +<DT><A NAME="foot3694">... Site.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html17"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> <DD><TT>http://xindy.sourceforge.net/</TT> </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3688">...main.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3696">...main.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html19"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> -<DD>Actually it sets <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4819"></A> to -<TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="4822"></A> if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4830"></A> package option is -not used, but <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="4834"></A> usually has the value +<DD>Actually it sets <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="4827"></A> to +<TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="4830"></A> if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4838"></A> package option is +not used, but <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="4842"></A> usually has the value <TT>main</TT>. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3691">...acronym</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3699">...acronym</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html20"><SUP>4</SUP></A></DT> <DD>if the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4920"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4928"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of acronyms is the main glossary </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3713">... this.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3721">... this.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html21"><SUP>5</SUP></A></DT> <DD>The only preamble restriction on <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> and <TT>\newacronym</TT> @@ -7722,14 +7733,14 @@ was removed in version 1.13, but the restriction remains for <TT>\loadglsentries</TT>. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3746">... specified.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3754">... specified.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html22"><SUP>6</SUP></A></DT> <DD>This is because <TT>\acronymtype</TT> is set to <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT> if -the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5654"></A> package option is not used. +the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5662"></A> package option is not used. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3779">... label</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3787">... label</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html24"><SUP>7</SUP></A></DT> <DD><TT>main</TT> for the main (default) glossary, <TT>\acronymtype</TT> for the list of acronyms, or the @@ -7737,63 +7748,63 @@ name supplied in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT> for additional glossaries. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3896">... hyphen</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3904">... hyphen</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html26"><SUP>8</SUP></A></DT> <DD>see -<TT>\setCompositor</TT><A NAME="6362"></A> described in +<TT>\setCompositor</TT><A NAME="6370"></A> described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary Entries</A> </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3897">... +<DT><A NAME="foot3905">... hyphen</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html27"><SUP>9</SUP></A></DT> -<DD>see <TT>\setAlphaCompositor</TT><A NAME="6365"></A> described in +<DD>see <TT>\setAlphaCompositor</TT><A NAME="6373"></A> described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary Entries</A> </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3827">...textsmaller,</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3835">...textsmaller,</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html28"><SUP>10</SUP></A></DT> <DD>you will need to load a package, such as <TT>relsize</TT>, that defines <TT>\textsmaller</TT> if you use this option. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3840">... +<DT><A NAME="foot3848">... <code>\textsmaller{#1}</code>.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html32"><SUP>11</SUP></A></DT> <DD>not that this was change from -using <TT>\smaller</TT><A NAME="7096"></A> to <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7099"></A> as declarations -cause a problem for <TT>\makefirstuc</TT><A NAME="7102"></A>. +using <TT>\smaller</TT><A NAME="7104"></A> to <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7107"></A> as declarations +cause a problem for <TT>\makefirstuc</TT><A NAME="7110"></A>. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2858">... package</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot2866">... package</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html34"><SUP>12</SUP></A></DT> <DD>as from version 1.18 </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3847">... column.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3855">... column.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html37"><SUP>13</SUP></A></DT> <DD>these lengths will not be -available if you use both the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="7469"></A> and <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="7478"></A> -package options or if you use the <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7487"></A> package option +available if you use both the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="7477"></A> and <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="7486"></A> +package options or if you use the <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="7495"></A> package option unless you explicitly load the relevant package. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3064">... +<DT><A NAME="foot3072">... environment.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html38"><SUP>14</SUP></A></DT> <DD>This style was supplied by Axel Menzel. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3850">...supertabular.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3858">...supertabular.</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html39"><SUP>15</SUP></A></DT> -<DD>e.g. with the <TT>flowfram</TT><A NAME="7820"></A> +<DD>e.g. with the <TT>flowfram</TT><A NAME="7828"></A> package. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot3863">...MakeTextUppercase,</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot3871">...MakeTextUppercase,</A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html40"><SUP>16</SUP></A></DT> <DD>defined in the <TT>textcase</TT> package |